Home

Accutorr Plus Service Manual

Contents

1. Notes J4 eT T 12 3 2 44 1 Detailed functional descriptions a 2 DC Power Supply E ES 12 V Battery i 8 S28 as are found the Theory of Operations section 5 5s av E g pee 0014 00 0184 SLA Bx x ao Gna Lead Acid Switched o 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional co O o Pump Rin OR S 31 Y AC f gt L412 V Nfilt 5 gt a 0146 00 0043 eatures 5 0014 00 0225 Li lon AC Hot i o 3 Shaded blocks are considered 2 black box devices ew i ee 1 14411143481 P Electro luminescent ovac iunt panel lite CAPTIVE CABLE S EUN TOU VAT be cl S c Speaker LCD Display n SEES Miguwo NIBP Board 2 m P Gnd a if Module gt PRE A 42V 0670 00 0584 02 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board 0160 00 0034 lt 8 g 0670 00 1134 nonn but not used in E A
2. OR Notes J4 2 m 1 2 3 2 44 1 Detailed functional descriptions m gI DC Power Supply T To a 12 V Battery UNS N D EX N EXEC are found in the Theory of Operations section p 0014 00 0184 SLA E Ee E ac Gnd Lead Acid i i i i 79 Rin Switched Di P Gnd z 2 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional o f 9 Rtn OR 5 8 1 AC Neut features RES N C e S 12 V Nfilt 0014 00 0225 Li lon 5 0146 00 0043 3 c AC Hot i 5a 3 Shaded blocks are considered 2 black box devices 1 12111444441 4 Electro luminescent ovac iunt H panel lite CAPTIVECABLE S EN toovac tok SN Go c Speaker e LCD Display ay N LOD lite Off NIBP Board P Gnd Module gt PRE
3. A cuff that is too small for the limb will result in erroneously high readings The correct size of the pressure cuff for a given patient has among other considerations a direct bearing on the accuracy of the obtained NIBP measurements Base your selection of the cuff size on the limb circumference of the patient The table above indicates the available Datascope cuffs for use with the Accutorr Plus The design dimensions of the cuffs and their intended uses are based on recommendations of the American Heart Association NOTE The cuffs that are used with the Accutorr Plus use special snap on connectors Adapter hoses are available to connect older style cuff connectors See Optional Accessories Section 5 2 in the Operating Instructions for a detailed list of cuffs and adapter hoses WARNING Use only Datascope cuffs Use of other than Datascope cuffs may result in erroneous measurements The pressure on the limb may not fall to zero between measurements if the cuff is wrapped too tightly Therefore assure that the cuff is properly applied The skin is sometimes fragile 1 on pediatrics geriatrics etc In these cases a longer timer interval should be considered to decrease the number of cuff inflations over a period of time NOTE In extreme cases a thin layer of soft roll or webril cotton padding may be applied to the limb in order to cushion the
4. 12 011 MBRD340 IRFZ44 R28 R23 10 7k Us Di 1 UC3843 R72 CR24 R96 1 8W SMT SMT R78 17 8K BAT54 1 50k Rt Ct ME 18 1 00k ME 1 1 8W SMT 1 1 8W SMT 1 8N SMT T0gopr 1 8W SMT 200V R19 R79 5 1000pF 681k 25 NPO 5 1000pF SMT 200V Cer J4PIN2 MPS2222 020 R10 12 33299 4 32377 1 10 7k BEEN 1 1 8W SMT 32403 7001 5 2 MTP2955E CR10 Qut2 Outi MBR1045 08 1 1 8W SMT 167665 2 R56 Q13 Set2 Hysi 372907 3 32MEG 1 1 BW SMT R83 3 10 7k 1 1 8W SMT R63 10 7k MP 1 p 1 5 ME 1 287002 1 1 B Q2 BS250P R34 R91 R42 47 5k 1 00k Las ME 1 1 UC3843 Re 1 1 8W SMT 1 8W SMT 1 8W SMT RS 5 ME 1 475 1 8W SMT 1 us 1 8W SMT 1 8W SMT 0 01 100V D Mono 27 4 1 SMT R41 2222 1 24k S MF SMT 1000pF 1 NPO 5 1 8W SMT SMT Schematic Drawing Main Power Supply Board for Lithium lon Battery 0014 00 0125 Page 2 of 2 Schematic Diagram Keyboard Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen 0331 00 0102 Revised 12 20 00 ER su
5. Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 Fuse Micro time lag 4A 250 V F1 F2 2 PC Assembly Dwg 3 Inductor GPx80 s T1 4 Choke Noise L1 3 5 XFMR Current EP7 4 5 6 XMFR EMI Inductor GPM40 s T6 7 Output Storage Choke L2 8 XFMR DC DC MSP1510 T3 9 XFMR Power MSP1510 T2 10 SEC Heatsink MSP1510 FN1 11 PRI FET Bracket MSP1510 FN2 12 Sub Assy B M Al 13 Cap DK R Acy 250V 220PF C5 6 14 Cap MO R Z5U 1 0 MF 20 C23 47 53 15 Cap MO A X7R 50V 0 001 MF 10 C51 16 Cap MO Z X7R 50V 0 1 MF 10 C55 17 Cap MO A X7R 50V 0 0047 MF 10 C54 18 Cap AIR 1 25V 100 00MF KME C43 19 Cap AIR 1 63V 10 00MF KME C30 20 Cap AI R 1 25V 47 00MF KME C2 17 21 32 21 Cap AL R 1 35V 390 00MF LXF C14 16 19 42 45 22 Cap AL R 1 35V 220 00MF LXF C11 12 17 34 23 Cap AL R 1 400V 82 00MF KMH C7 24 Cap FI R ACX 250V 0 100MF C1 25 Tstr P 60V 0 6A 2907A C6 12 26 Tstr P 40V 3 0A TIP32 Q3 27 Tstr FET N 600V 6 0A MTP6N60 Q1 28 Tstr FET N 60V 35 0A IRFZ44 Q11 29 Tstr FET P 60V 12 0 2955 95 30 Tstr FET N 100V 1 0A IRFD110 Q16 31 Tstr FET P 45V 0 18A BS250 Q2 32 Rect 1xSCH 45V 10A MBR1045 CR9 10 33 Rect 1xUFR 300V 8A BYTO8P300 CR11 34 Diode ZNR 1 0W 5 P 3 3V CR14 35 Diode ZNR 1 0W 5 P 18 0V CR4 36 Rect UFR 1000V 1 0A MUR1100 P CR2 37 Rect Bridge 600V 2A Small CR1 38 IC VR ADJ SHUNT TL431 TO 92 U4 39 IC VR 15V 4 0 5A 79M15 TO220 U3 40 VR 15V 4 0 5A 78M15 TO220 05 41 IC Volt Detector ICL7665CPA U8 42
6. RS232 LEVEL SHIFTER ca MICROCONTROLLER exo 102 115 1259 E WEE ny pii e mam RE E me NEL ti LEER PCR FERES mn 4 56 I m im pee TSTS emp 582 1 a a ok uF CONFIGURATION PORT i gr 28 GND 18 pem BATTERY BACKED UP BATTERY BACKED UP STATIC RAM 1 STATIC RAM 818 ata EH H ais 818 15 14 Ala ais al ale aia paz Ai por ete ES Ea Ed bos 19 124 RZ Pia az 4 pos 22 82 5 5 2 E BER a AT vce A ind Rh 1 cse com ce B TERT UCET Sat GAG I8 1 ume eae D uo Schematic Diagram unm 0387 00 0650 XX Sheet 1 of 5 Revised 12 20 00 PER UCC PIN FOR UL 5 23 ue veez 4 c 1 1uF READ amp WRITE STROBE WRITE STROBE TIMING CONTROL GENERATOR INPUT STROBE OUTPUT STROBE GENERATOR GENERATOR ia UCC 163 GND VOCAL 2 BATTERY BACKUP VOLTAGE REGULATOR SERIAL CLOCK 14 2 mM gt TE CC 14 GND 7 ONE BYPFSS CAPAC PER
7. 0997 00 0944 10 8 V Battery Lithium lon SLA Batt Cable 0146 00 0069 0406 00 0754 OR OR J4 E 12V Battery Lead Acid 8 42 5 0146 00 0043 25 J3 5 A r Speaker with Cable 0012 00 0257 05 0012 00 0943 02 Electro luminescent CABLE S panel lite Si A 2 LCD Display S oF Module BS gt 0160 00 0034 2 CAPTIVE CABLE lt 0012 00 0988 J3 NIBP Board 0670 00 0584 02 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board shown but not used in J4 0670 00 1134 all versions 0012 00 0944 J8 J1 J6 CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without SpO2 J3 J2 J7 0012 00 1238 Captive Cable aptive Cable Soldered to Soldered to Jt CPU Circuit board CPU Circuit board Male Female Masimo SpO2 44 Captive cable soldered to the Header Connector interface board J5 Communication Circuit board 0670 00 0716 T ERE go UT pI e A P1 2
8. era a aaayy adasa Taggia a aaa s 2 33919383974379 83445 334 vi YY VIV vy v v 4 5 8 EEE g SEE d BET ol E a e A 5 amp 9 7 117 8 2 5 g 8 TO IO IO IO IO TO TO oe lica ck IO IO IO IO IO IQ IQ A gt _ 1 1 On CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without SpO2 PALER foot hth BR Te hd 8 SBBNBRRBRVSSSISHESRISSCPVOTEON S amp 29242285540 9 AARE 2808589 2989299999099250s25 EEEE 85434444294 85558 gt a 2 215 922 golog 2 22 amp B m 5 8 2 5 8 3 4848 a 7839 A Be sm 8 8 9 9 3 5 5 5 5 5 S S S S 15 5 z 82 a 58485 5 92 S sie Q c ER E 3 TUIS 1314 940 n X se Pe IM xternal Communication SBSNSRVBSVSSSISaESRISCP ooh CELOS g BOSS 4 9 9 H 4 20 5 NOOO SIOZ H 6 7 ofc ass 2 Battery shown but not Circuit board KEYPADS PETA ENTES Datascope 8328889 used inall versi
9. P dfe dE P R66 rc ere ae int ie B CR14 ESSERE 0670 00 0593 03 Revised 12 21 00 Datascope SpO2 Board 5 16 CURRENT TO VOLTAGE PREAMP 109 100 102 sw SENSOR DETECT 28 8 RSI pic cL 55 m LL SEN FLY le m v4 1 7 4 SATURATION DETECT HCTES goic 14 64 7 DEMULTIPLEXER g eiur RIG LOW PASS FILTERS CS8 THRU C63 C55 AND ARE PARTS NOTE SELECTED TO 2 5 Schematic Diagram Datascope SpO2 Board 0387 00 0593 03 Sheet 1 of 3 MULTIPLEXER 5 17 PROCESSOR D en ral STATIC RAM vec eur ZR aun 28 GND 14 gt E E 555555555553 885404805088 A e sy aa i ua 523 QNI 18 22 15 23 5 uovo UNUSED SPARE GATES Ried VCC 14 GND 7 x BONERS E 1 1i 1i gs UCC 32 GND 169 4T 145 GNI 75 143 0 7 UCC 145 GND 7 gt 125 HCTB4 So OFSSING GNIPNG NOTE ON PC BOARD TIE TO CNDA 71 2 THEN TIE 21 2 TO J1 8 GND Schematic Diagram Datascope 2 Board 0387 00 0593 03 Sheet 2 of 3 Revised 12 20 0
10. Test Display Keyboard Test Accutorr Plus with Trend and SpO2 Figure 7 2 4 Press the Deflate key for 3 seconds to exit keypad test Revised 09 02 99 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 5 4 LED Test 2a 2b This test allows the LED function to be verified by driving all seven LEDs with numbers from 0 to 9 in sequential order For this test all annunciator LEDs turn on for 1 second Test Description Test Room Number Sub Test Patient Bed Letter 7 Segment LED Test 2 a Annunciator LED Test 2 b Table 7 3 7 5 5 Communications Test 3a 3b This test checks the integrity of the external communications systems Test 3a checks the external RS232 interface and requires that the transmit and receive pins be connected together Test 3b checks the Datascope Download port and requires that the tip transmit and ring receive pins be connected together The CRC table is transmitted and received If the CRC data received matches che CRC table transmitted the test passes otherwise a failure is reported Test Description Short Connector Pins Test Room Number Sub Test Patient Bed Letter RS232 Port Test Transmit 2 and a Receive 3 Tip and Ring Download Port Test Table 7 4 7 5 6 Recorder Test 4 1 Select Room Number 4
11. 33 E e FIC BAT NOR CAL SWIT GND PRE DIR 03 HI LO CAL VREG 2 2 5V SW2 CONFIGURATION LOW CAL Open Closed LOW BAT 1 DEGF DEGC J Figure 2 3 PRED DIRECT 1 4 See note below NOTE SW2 4 toggles between TeetHoader HCAL and LCAL when opened Module Block Diagram Predicative Temperature Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Revised 1220 00 2 2 5 SpO2 Module Accutorr Plus Model with Datascope SpO2 only General Theory of SpO determination A pulsatile arterial saturated oxygen monitor detects the oxygenation level of the blood in the body s arterial circulation It is used to continuously monitor the effectiveness of the pulmonary system lungs Specifically the device within limits determines the fraction of hemoglobin molecules carrying oxygen from the lungs to the body cells Termed 96 SpO2 this fraction is normally about 97 percent The device measures the relative attenuation of two specific wavelengths of light red and infrared by the arterial blood A sensor from the instrument contains two sets of LED s to illuminate a portion of the
12. Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 6 Parts Datascope Part Number 0436 00 0117 03 0436 00 0118 0401 00 0034 0436 00 0117 02 0040 00 0305 Sample Rolling Stand Revised 06 12 02 6 19 This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts 0014 00 0195 01 POWER SUPPLY DC DC 3000 VDC Ti ISOLATION 1W SIP SINGLE OUTPUT 0060 00 0383 01 Module Specification Accutorr Plus We cu 0060 00 0383 02 Design Documentation PTM AccutorPlus 0060 00 0383 03 Worst Case Analysis Accutorr Plus er eae ee I 0060 00 0383 05 Design Validation Accutorr Plus ratto Ro e 0136 24 1010 CONNECTOR PC HEADER STRAIGHT DUAL J4 ROW 100 PITCH 0136 57 0044 Connector PLCC Socket XU4 0136 92 0002 CONNECTOR PC HEADER STRAIGHT J2 J3 LOCKING AND POLARIZED 0151 00 0190 TRANSISTOR SMD N CHANNEL TMOS FET xa 2N7002 0151 00 0206 TRANSISTOR 0202 SMD P CHANNEL MOSFET 0153 00 0177 DIODE 1N5817 SCHOTTKY RECTIFIER CRI _ 0155 00 0576 IC OPTOISOLATOR CNY173 0155 00 0849 02 ADCO834B 8 BIT SERIAL 4 CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER 7 uc zd 0155 00 0853 02 MC34064 UNDERVOLTAGE SENSOR CIRCUIT 0155 00 0854 02 IC LM385 2 5 2 5 MICROPOWER REFERENCE 0155 00 1038 02 IC S812XXSG HIGH PRECISION VOLTAGE REGULATOR 5 0V 0155 90 0299 IC 8 BIT MICROCONTROLLE
13. c 5 gt 84 1 us ciu e lr PEN Big Rb Succ R ix Yi 3 3 cz R2 cal Se far cru 228 22 3 MOUNTING HOLES EJ TER iur 16 1823 om x TONED SRG caa IK 5832 3 ad DAC DAT FERRBEAD dur mim Ui J3 1 3 23 2 SPKR ek i Schematic Diagram Tone Processor Board Layout 0387 00 1134 Revised 2 28 01 This page intentionally left blank 5 44 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 5 Schematics 6 0 REPLACEMENT PARTS CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER 6 1 Introduction 6 2 Available Replacement Parts and Sub Assemblies 6 3 Product Variations and Options 6 4 Exchange Program 6 5 Replacement Parts Pricing Information 6 6 Ordering Information 2525 65 02 eq eh RAs 6 2 6 7 Abbreviations 6 8 Isometric Drawings and Parts Lists 6 9 Circuit Board Parts Lists 6 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Service Manual provides information necessary to identify the replacement parts and assemblies of the instrument 6 2 AVAILABLE REPLACEMENT PARTS AND SUB ASSEMBLIES The parts listings which follow are divided into two sections The Isometric Drawings and the accompanying parts lists identify the available chassis mounted components A listing for the components on each circuit board then follows 6 3 PRODUCT VARIATIONS AND OPTIONS Product variations due to dif
14. e PATIENT SETUP TIMER TEMP PATIENT INFO mi SCAN ROOM 1 BED EMORY FUL 1 e v SELECT PRINT DEFAULTS STANDBY e Figure 7 5 Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and Datascope SpO2 Ln Datascope Accutorr Plus 7 n r 1 BE 1 PATIENT INFO DATA SCAN ROOM MEMORY FULL HOLD TO CLEAR Lier ON 7 et e Figure 7 6 Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and Nellcor or Masimo 502 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration Accutorr Plus e e e PATIENT SETUP DEFLATE 1 IE ROOM DELETE INFO c3 PATIENT INFO 1 m ROOM BED PRINT DEFAULTS STANDBY Figure 7 8 Accutorr Plus NIBP Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration Revised 03 25 02 This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 8 0 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER 8 1 Introduction 8 2 Limitations of Physiological Simulators 8 3 Preventive Mai
15. CONNECT TO PATTERY CE EELCLELCI 1726254 M E mv Schematic Diagram Predictive Thermometer Board with Battery 0387 00 0582 Sheet 1 of 1 Revised 12 20 00 5 7 INPUT PROBE CONNECTORS XC BOND 4 VIN WC 52 1 ein lcu us eus om 2527 32 3 E 4 32 4 OIL INC PINO HCOCH UTERE Ree 214 00 0195 21 M ce Quas m Schematic Diagram Predictive Thermometer Board 0387 00 0582 Sheet 1 of 1 Revised 12 20 00 oooooo oooonooo oooocoooo ye 3 Doooooocoo Recorder Board 0670 00 0583 01 Revised 12 20 00 OSCILLATOR cis UCC UP GND GNDP gan 2 2524 145 GND 75 aL RI 2 D f a gt Q 254 DIP 5 GNO GNDP zen tex E Bax E PRINT TIMING vec LED CPLU BOARD CONNECTOR PL RIB 911 dee SECUS Toa 2 ucc os ot rae 144146 E CUCC 144 GND 7 F 2 1 HOME SWITCH R13 5 12K gt 5 RS R12 UCA 322 X QR adi ame E 14 GND 7 cis 1 1 o Wi ot D cix U4 452 1 e 2 ve Q 8 ua 14 GND 7 PRINTER CONTROLLER 5555585555555 555555 5 a HH p 8 MOTOR DRIV
16. C Performance Considerations To insure optimal performance use an appropriate sensor apply it as directed and observe all warnings and cautions If excessive ambient light is present cover the sensor site with opaque material Failure to do so may result in inaccurate measurements Light sources that can affect performance include surgical lights especially those with a xenon light source bilirubin lamps fluorescent lights infrared heating lamps and direct sunlight Special Features D Automatic Calibration The oximetry subsystem incorporates automatic calibration mechanisms It is automatically calibrated each time it is turned on at periodic intervals thereafter and whenever a new sensor is connected Also the intensity of the sensor s LEDs is adjusted automatically to compensate for differences in tissue thickness Each sensor is calibrated when manufactured the effective mean wavelength of the red LED is determined and encoded into a calibration resistor in the sensor plug The instrument s software reads this calibration resistor to determine the appropriate calibration coefficients for the measurements obtained by that sensor Oximetry Sensitivity Mode and Post Averaging Time The Accutorr Plus sensitivity mode for SpO is set to normal and the averaging of the saturation pulse rate and signal strength measurements for SpO2 is set to 8 seconds Added 02 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Oper
17. 0670 00 0584 02 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board 00 em vj shown but not used in 0160 00 0034 l gs 0670 00 1134 CAPTIVE CABLE N 5 Q xouoogogozazcw rg 4092322258859 88 8223293888 8320235 gla 2 8 4 a aaay a laggy 9 42s S38 9322349 9o VV VIVI 8 4 5 3 SEE 2 5 MEE 8 5188 9 383 131 2 a 8 TO IO TO IQ IO IO TO C 2 2 Qc 1 1 en CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without SpO2 een 8 SBBNBRRBRVSSSISHESRISCPVETEON S 5975 46 938 982 939938339972 meae e 2 ae Ee z jg 4 oS EPEE 3 5 5 8g i 9825 5 E Spe o 29 16 40 SART o HP Pr Ie eem 6 255547 v T v 42 SpO2 j 4718 13 14 910 718 1344 910 YI xternal Communication interface board 2055 4 95 0 8 e 70 00 067 a7 A9 QD Circuit boar
18. NIBP Trend LCD USA IEC English 0998 00 0444 41 0998 00 0444 L41 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 01 English NIBP only USA IEC 0998 00 0444 3 1 0998 000444 L3 1 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 01 NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO IEC German 0998 00 0444 52 0998 00 0444 L52 0331 00 0103 0330 00 0027 02 NIBP Trend LCD IEC German 0998 00 0444 42 0998 00 0444 L42 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 02 NIBP only IEC German 0998 00 0444 32 0998 00 0444 L32 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 02 NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO IEC Spanish 0998 00 0444 53 0998 00 0444 L53 0331 00 0103 0330 00 0027 03 NIBP Trend LCD IEC Spanish 0998 00 0444 43 0998 00 0444 L43 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 03 NIBP only IEC Spanish 0998 00 0444 33 0998 00 0444 L33 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 03 NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO IEC French 0998 00 0444 54 0998 00 0444 L54 0331 00 0103 0330 00 0027 04 NIBP Trend LCD IEC French 0998 00 0444 44 0998 00 0444 L44 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 04 NIBP only IEC French 0998 00 0444 34 0998 00 0444 L34 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 04 NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO IEC Italian 0998 00 0444 56 0998 00 0444 L56 0331 00 0103 0330 00 0027 06 NIBP Trend LCD IEC Italian 0998 00 0444 46 0998 00 0444 L46 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 06 NIBP o
19. KEYD6 KEYD7 al swa KEY2 swr Y swio swe sw22 2 Schematic Diagram Keyboard Accutorr Plus NIBP 0331 00 0108 Revised 12 20 00 5 37 c E 0000 82 El ennai 9290909 20 ore z a C0000 00ic NOTE When replacing the Nellcor MP 304 board make sure to remove all jumpers from the Nellcor board Nelicor Interface PCB 0670 00 0675 Revised 12 20 00 SPARES 25 MTGI2S 5U 17 250 DO NOT INSTALL MTGI66 MTGIEs ISOLATION BRRRIER 591 TPS MP304 Schematic Diagram Nellcor Interface PCB 0387 00 0675 Sheet 1 of 1 Revised 12 20 00 5 39 as o d Masomo Interface PCB 0670 00 0716 Revised 12 20 00 5 40 2138 51 24 FROM ACCUTORR ux TPS TPS TPE 1 Ljre 1 Sorc 555145016 CNO 150 QNO OC GND 4 SPARES DO NOT INSTALL C21 amp C22 150 150 Schematic Diagram Masimo interface PCB 0387 00 0716 Sheet 1 of 1 Revised 12 20 00 HTGI28 MTG125 165 HTGi66 5 41 sor Board Layout Tone Proces 0670 00 1134 Revised 2 28 01 Succ LOCATE NEAR 00981555 vir T r So se FERRBEAD iur x
20. TEMP Illegal Mode Thermometer switch is set wrong 991 TEMP Module Failed Thermometer internal failure 995 SpO Uncalibrated SpO fails calibration check 996 SpO Failure SpO failed self test Table 7 1 Error Codes Revised 2 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 1 INTRODUCTION The Accutorr Plus is a state of the art device employing digital determination and verification systems to obtain superior performance for the life of the product Most function calibration constants are written into the operating software therefore for the most part there are no means to calibrate or adjust system functions The instrument contains extensive Service Diagnostics that will in most cases isolate a malfunction to the lowest serviceable module NOTE This procedure refers to this instrument as the UUT Unit Under Test All internal verifications and adjustments should be performed with the internal battery disconnected Operate the UUT on the main power supply This will insure a reliable power source for the test as well as providing a measure of safety in case of accidental overload of the power source To re initialize the low battery detector circuits reconnect the battery at the conclusion of all tests while the UUT is on A C power source Reset the real time clock and date if required 7 2 WARNINGS AND GUIDELINES In the event that the instr
21. sur Y smo Y LED DRIVER 7218 PLOC VOC PIN 19 GND PIN28 KEYDO 2 K KEYDS KEYDS KEYD7 wm sin wos ow ls vey m yo ay 6 1 Schematic Diagram Keyboard Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 0331 00 0103 Revised 12 20 00 an 11 12 es 18 i a SA NA INA 11 4 cre 7 SA SA oe ce ote tte eo ae LI j DAN 2 Schematic Diagram Y sur Y suo Y Keyboard Accutorr Plus NIBP 0331 00 0104 Revised 12 20 00 5 36 22 KEYDO 2277 20 KEYD2 12 8 KeYOs 11 7 1411 16 ___ 15 KEYD7 NER 14 KEYO 18 KEYI 3 10 9 8 1 107 z os ee pee 1 3 toa 2 LL jio 30 PIN QA cri R1 0 OHM W Swot R4 00HM vec Ct 47 uF 16V KEYO Swo2 X Maxim 7218A 01 Ui LED DRIVER 7218A PLCC VCC PIN 19 GND PIN 28 KEYDO KEYD1 KEYD2 swos y swos X KEYD3 KEYD4 KEYDS sw14 y sws sw sway
22. the number Press to Change 3 Press the Timer Temp key to activate the Figure 7 3 Hour Display minute display Minute NOTE The Accutorr Plus always displays TIMER TEMP time in a 24 hour format EET Display After the time and date have been set press to exit the clock Press the Up or Down Arrow key 12 or 13 set mode 8 9 to change the number Continue pressing TON ress to Change the Timer Temp key and the Arrow keys to set the month day and year in that order Figure 7 4 Minute Display Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration gt 7 8 NIBP NORMAL OPERATION 1 Press the left arrow key on the Cufflink Simulator to highlight SELECT BP then press the ENT key Set pressure test to 120 80 90 and press the ENT key Attach the simulator Cufflink to the input pressure fitting of UUT Press the interval key of the keypad until a 1 is shown in the Timer Temp Interval LED of the UUT Press the Patient Size key to select Adult size indicator Press the Set Alarms key to enter the alarm setting mode Use the Up and Down arrow keys to set the Systolic Low alarm to 115 mmHg Press the Set Alarms key again and set the Diastolic Low Alarm to 95 mmHg Press the Start NIBP key Verify the monitor takes a measurement and the Systolic and the Diastolic low alarms are violated The LED s for these parameters will blink on and off and an alarm tone w
23. 2 amp 8 g Sss 3 amp 885 8 92 258 iS E 1918 1544 940 52347 NagasozzcacoOuO0AGN p 7 v nm Masimo SpO2 748 1344 910 cue 910 H y xterna Communication 00 interface board 5 24 82 3 2E 0670 00 0716 50 os gt Battery shown but Circuit board KEYPADS 4 Sai used in all versions Recorder GRAPHIC OVERLAYS J2 z 220353 ozgdis s 1 1 0670 00 0661 Units with Trend display but 0012 00 1338 he X 8 zu 3 2 S 5 38 00 0026 XX rs a 2 ES 5 2 circuit board EE EE No SpO2 0331 00 0102 9 2 aod 2 5 0670 00 0583 28 5145 area i 5 80 280 RO EL 5 Units with Trend display and 8 meer Masimo SpO2 0331000108 gt 0330 00 0027 aggy s se ircui no xx MUI EE KE ee 522 gt J EU Units without Trend display 0330 00 0025 XX Bd MS 3 DO g ae Crea o 2a and No SpO2 0331 00 0104 gt 38 g 2000 31 0671 00 0163 E gt 8 4 oom D 2 E 2 J6 3 A 223 8539 2 3 1457 9 101 m Temp Probe receptacle 3068 2 593 202 0012 00 0953 WITH 9 V battery 5 5 5 D 8828054 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9
24. Keypad Test LED Test 2a 2b Communications Test 3a 3b Recorder Test 4 Recorder Print Head Adjustment Pump Test 5 Leak Test 7 Over Pressure Test 8a 8b 8c Pulse Channel DC Offset Test 9a Ob 9c Pulse Channel Average Noise Test 10a 10b 10 7 10 Main Pressure Transducer Verification Test 11a 11b Accutorr Plus Service Manual Introduction 7 5 13 Verification of Accutorr Plus Pneumatic Performance Using the Cufflink NIBP Emulator 11d 7 5 14 Over Pressure Transducer Verification 12c 12a 12b 7 12 7 5 15 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration 7 5 16 Over Pressure Transducer Calibration 7 5 17 Battery Selection 13 Predictive Thermometer Verification and Calibration 761 Temperature Accuracy Verification with the Predictive Temperature Simulator 7 6 2 Water Bath Method 7 6 3 System Calibration Procedure 7 6 4 Temperature Verification Test Infrared Thermometer 7 6 5 Low Battery Sensing 7 7 Battery Test for Accutorr Plus T Low Battery Indicator and Low Battery Cut Off 7 7 2 Set the Current Time 7 8 NIBP Normal Operation 7 9 Trend Memory Initialization 7 10 SpO2 Normal Operation Accutorr Plus with SpO only PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Introduction Limitations of Physiological Simulators Preventive Maintenance Schedule 8 5 1 Mechanical and Physical Visual Inspection One Year Interval 8 3 2 Electrical Safety and Performance Checks One Year Interval Accut
25. R29 41 0324 00 0104 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 4W 5 100K R14 R21 R27 42 0326 01 1002 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 10K R13 R25 43 0326 01 1003 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 R12 R22 R23 R26 100K 44 0326 01 2001 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 2K R24 45 0326 01 2372 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 R6 23 7K 46 0326 01 3921 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 R11 3 92K 47 0326 01 4752 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 R9 R10 47 5K 48 0388 00 0582 REV PCB PTM Accutorr Plus F 49 0432 00 0008 Mounting Electrical 600 pitch Single In Line XSW1 6 22 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Recorder Board Assembly 0670 00 0583 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 0108 00 0058 Bead Leaded Ferrite L1 2 0108 00 0078 INDUCTOR FIXED 150 uH power L2 3 0136 00 0201 CONNECTOR PC Test point TP1 4 0136 00 0226 CONNECTOR PC Receptacle 9 J3 pin flex cable 5 0136 57 0044 SOCKET PLCC 44 pin XU1 6 0136 92 0005 CONNECTOR PC Header straight J2 locking and polarized 5 pin 7 0151 00 0013 TRANSISTOR PNP 2N3906 Q3 8 0151 00 0035 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N3904 Q1 Q2 Q4 Q5 9 0151 00 0133 TRANSISTOR 2N6715 NPN Q6 Q7 medium power 10 0153 00 0014 DIODE PN Switching D1 D2 1N4148 1N914 11 0153 00 0086 DIODE PN Rectifier 1N5806 D3 12 0155 00 0081 IC Hex Inver
26. rectal temperature vs axillary temperature have met with less than favorable results WARNING Iris essential that a single use disposable probe cover is used when taking temperature measurements 1 3 11 1 Predictive Thermometer Measurements When the predictive thermometer probe is removed from its holder the Interval Elap Time Temp display shows 85 F 29 4 C This is an internal self test feature Once the probe is in place in the patient and the probe detects a temperature greater then 85 F 29 4 C the Time Temp display will begin flashing When the temperature measurement is complete the display will stop flashing and a beep tone is sounded NOTE After a measurement allow 60 seconds for the tip to cool before proceeding with the next measurement 1 3 11 2 to Apply Probe Cover 1 To open probe cover box remove the tear out tab on the end of the box top 2 Place the box of probe covers into the holder of the thermometer module with the opening to the bottom 3 Remove the probe from its chamber in the thermometer This turns on the thermometer Accutorr Plus Service Manual 1 43 Chapter 1 Operation 4 Insert the probe into a probe cover in the box and push firmly on the cap of the probe handle until you feel the probe cover snap into place PRECAUTION Use only Datascope recommended probe covers Use of any other probe cover may result in erroneous readings or damage to th
27. 145819 TP2 MTG125 C12 5 LO 9 7190 i S Nienrace HEADERS EXT RXD 8 1x0 Schematic Diagram Communication Board 0387 00 0661 Sheet 1 of 1 Revised 12 20 00 5 29 Viulk rannat 17 3 Bulk n 156 m E 156 42445 1 qiie EAD 1 605 0 wens nono vean on maw 28 2 H TRVCONVENTER sinant Schematic Diagram Main Power Supply Board for Sealed Lead Acid Battery 0014 00 0184 Sheet 1 of 2 Revised 12 20 00 emis 571 D 3 00 2449 ES gai 2009 Cer 10 Sut 2 ir Vir xn asisoP ens gt 32403 2201 wena 500 Schematic Diagram Main Power Supply Board n for Sealed Lead Acid Battery 0014 00 0184 Sheet 2 of 2 7 Revised 12 20 00 5 51 J2 156Hdr 13495 2 250 Micro cR1 T6 2A 600V R4 R2 226k 120k MF 20 1 MO C5 220pF 220pF Cer Cer y y 0 01 100V Mono R7 13 7k 1 1 8W SMT 1000pF 5 50V NPO R5 1 00k MF 1 47 5 1 8W SMT 4 1 8W SMT R6 475 1 1 8W SMT Mono 5 MPS2907 0 01 c2 TL cra 1000pF 50 ZN ev 2000 KME MUR110
28. 2 2 DETAILED CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS This section of the manual describes the operation of each circuit block Refer to the schematic diagrams in Chapter 5 Included are descriptions for the following Circuit Board Assemblies Circuit Descriptions Page 2 2 1 LCD CPU Module 2 9 2 2 2 NIBP Module Linear Bleed 2 17 2 2 3 Recorder Module 2 20 2 2 4 Predictive Thermometer Module 2 21 2 2 5 SpO2 Module 2 22 2 2 6 Main Power Supply 2 25 227 Communication Board 2 26 2 2 8 LCD Inverter Module 2 28 2 2 9 Nellcor MP304 Board 2 29 2 2 10 Nellcor Interface Board 2 30 2 2 11 Masimo Technology 2 31 2 2 12 Masimo Interface Board Theory of Operation 2 32 2 2 13 Tone Processor Board Theory of Operation 2 34 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Accutorr Plus with Datascope SpO2 or without SpO2 Int Lithium lon erconnect Diagram 0146 00 0069 10 8 V Battery OR
29. 2 E apa g i 8 io 14 828 4789 10 13 ra 1 F ig Units with Trend dis and 1 2 NELLCOR SpO2 2 0331 0 NELLCOR if ETE SpO2 Circuit ies Sum EH ej Units wit Board MP304 8 and No SpO2 0331 00 0104 ENS 9 9 g 3 0671 00 0162 E o D H 5 S i zz i232 iz 7 85 31 274 5 3 age 1 965 589 ess 2 6 9 o0 2 5 5 5 5 spoz i Battery shown but 1 usedin all versions Temp Probe receptacle 0012 00 0953 WITH 9V battery or 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9V battery Accutorr Plus with NELLCOR SpO2 and without SpO2 Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 5 3 10 8 V Battery Lithium lon 0146 00 0069 Accutorr Plus with Masimo SpO2 or without SpO2 Interconnect Diagram OR otes 1 Detailed functional descriptions 23 Dc Power Supply a J m 14 12 V Battery Qe N Z to wi cule aio ol A Tu esce 4 iona Nout features NIC 8 EO WM 0146 00 0043 3 Shaded blocks are considered black box devices 0014 00 0225 Li on K dm ON ectro luminescen my panel lite chat eS ag zm LCD Display UL EES NIBP Board Module 5 2 P ran 0670 00 0584 02 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor oari 0160 00 0034 8 8 0870 00 1134 bin hof
30. 30 1K 64 0309 00 3013 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R42 301K 65 0309 00 3321 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R33 3 32K 6 26 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts NIBP Circuit Board Assembly 0670 00 0584 02 Item Part Number Description Reference No 66 0309 00 3572 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R19 35 7K 67 0309 00 3653 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R55 365K 68 0309 00 3654 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R51 3 65M 69 0309 00 3831 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R26 3 83K 70 0309 00 4751 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R8 4 75K 71 0309 00 5112 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R16 R24 51 1K 72 0309 00 5903 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R10 R18 590K 73 0309 00 6042 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R57 60 4K 74 0309 00 7500 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R25 R58 750 Ohm 75 0309 00 8660 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R29 866 Ohm 76 0310 00 0100 RESISTOR Metal film 1 4 W 1 R1 10 Ohm 77 0311 01 1501 RESISTOR Variable 500 Ohm R1 78 0311 01 2502 RESISTOR Variable 5K R40 79 0315 00 0102 RESISTOR Carbon film 1 4 W R28 596 1K 80 0315 00 0103 RESISTOR Carbon film 1 4 W R21 R34 R35 596 10K 81 0315 00 0104 RESISTOR Carbon film 1 4 W R2 R38 R41 R44 R53 596 100K 82 0315 00 0202 RESISTOR Carbon film 1 4
31. 52 vv 1 External Communication 0012 00 1338 83933537 Circuit board KEYPADS vaso 6g NGO S S2 F IR g Patery shown but not Recorder ja 0670 00 0661 01 GRAPHIC OVERLAYS SpO Circuit gorg Soe 5 ni versions its wi i Board MS 3 i 5 Units with Trend display and 8 1 3 OM 2 0 Captive Cable No SpO2 0331 00 0102 0671 00 0163 8 2 5 8G ND aoa ms Soldered to _ 3 5 goo D D E socer M E C x ccn PRIM ccc Units without Trend display 2 IT and No 5 2 0331 00 0104 gt 0330 00 0025 XX O O U gt lt 1 2 p ols0 oD Masimo SpO2 sensor 3 8 P1 85 Slo receptacle Front Panel 8 D s gt 4 2g 3 S os 0012 00 1344 2025 5 Temp Probe receptacle 825 g 8 SFD 5 ogg 3 0012 00 0953 WITH 9V battery or 5 5 8 203 8 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9V battery ao Sz 23 5 Accutorr Plus with Masimo 5 5 om SpO or without SpO2 Wiring Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 2 8 2 2 1 LED CPU Module 0670 00 0650 03 04 The 0670 00 0650 03 is specified to be used with the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO The 0670 00 0650 04 is specified to be used with Accutorr Plus NIBP and the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen Resource
32. Ceramic 40 0283 05 0103 CAPACITOR 0 01pF 10 100V C16 C26 Ceramic 41 0283 05 0220 CAPACITOR 22pF 1095 200V C30 Ceramic 42 0283 05 0332 CAPACITOR 0 0033uF 10 100V C15 Ceramic 43 0285 00 0055 CAPACITOR 0 47 596 63V C1 C2 C3 C5 C35 Poly 44 0285 15 1473 CAPACITOR 0 047uF 5 63V C36 Poly 45 0290 02 3105 CAPACITOR 1 10 35V C28 Dipped Tantalum 46 0290 11 0001 CAPACITOR 3300uF 20 16V C27 Electrolytic 47 48 0307 00 0029 RESISTOR NETWORK 14 PIN RN1 RN2 DIP 10K 49 0307 01 0102 RESISTOR NETWORK 10 PIN RN3 SIP 1K 50 0309 00 1001 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 1K R3 R7 R12 R15 R20 51 0309 00 1002 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R5 R14 R49 10K 52 0309 00 1003 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R43 100K 53 0309 00 1103 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R23 110K 54 0309 00 1213 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R9 R46 R50 121K 55 0309 00 1214 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R17 R39 1 24M 56 0309 00 1500 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R22 150 Ohm 57 0309 00 1502 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 196 R56 15K 58 0309 00 1691 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R27 1 69K 59 0309 00 1823 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R48 R52 182K 60 0309 00 2001 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R47 R54 2K 61 0309 00 2212 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R13 R37 R45 224K 62 0309 00 2431 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R11 2 43K 63 0309 00 3012 RESISTOR Metal film 1 8 W 1 R30
33. IC OPA2336 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER U5 9 0155 00 1040 02 IC DS1811 ECONORESET WITH OPEN DRAIN U3 OUTPUT 10 0158 05 0011 CRYSTAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR W TRISTATE Y1 3 69MHZ 11 0287 00 2102 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 5 C9 0 001UF 12 0287 01 2103 CAPACITOR SMD 1206 CERAMIC X7R 5 C12 C17 C21 C22 0 01UF 13 0287 01 2104 CAPACITOR SMD 1206 CERAMIC X7R 5 C1 C4 C6 C8 C13 C16 C23 0 1UF 14 0287 02 1105 CAPACITOR SMD 1825 CERAMIC X7R 10 C3 C7 1UF 15 0289 01 4106 CAPACITOR SMD ELECTROLYTIC 20 10UF C2 16 0324 01 1000 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 4W 1 100 R2 R19 17 0325 02 3002 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 0 1 1206 30 0K R7 18 0326 01 1001 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 1K R3 R6 19 0326 01 1002 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 10K R1 R4 R5 R8 R10 R21 R23 R26 R27 R34 20 0326 01 1502 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 15K R25 21 0326 01 2002 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 20K R24 22 0326 01 3321 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 3 32K R32 23 0326 01 33R2 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 33 2 R9 R11 R18 R20 24 0388 00 1134 PCB TONE PROCESSOR 25 1308 403 422 CONN HOUSING METHODE 1308 403 422 26 7560 05 CABLE 22 AWG 5 COND MOLEX 7560 05 27 0155 90 0419 MICROCONTROLLER U1 28 0060 00 1115 01 MODULE SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT 29 0060 00 1115 02 DESIGN SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT 30 0060 00 1115 03 WORST CASE ANALYSIS DOCUMENT 31 0060 00 1115 05 TEST PROTOCOL DOCUMENT 32 0060 00 1115 06 TEST SPECIFICATION Accutorr Plus Ser
34. Interference Interference on signal Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8853 Pulse Search Unit cannot find signal Nellcor SpO2 Module will report Pulse Search 8853 when the sensor is not on the patient 8854 Weak Pulse Weak pulse detected Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8855 No Pulse No pulse detected Datascope SpO2 only 8856 Check Sensor Sensor problem Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8857 PR lt 30 Pulse rate is less than 30 bpm Datascope SpO only 8857 PR 21 Pulse rate is less than 21 bpm Nellcor SpO only 8857 PR lt 26 Pulse rate is less than 26 bpm Masimo SpO only 8858 PR gt 249 Pulse rate is greater than 249 bpm Nellcor SpO only 8858 gt 239 Pulse rate is greater than 239 bpm Masimo SpO only 8858 PR gt 250 Pulse rate is greater than 250 bpm Datascope SpO2 only SYSTEM 984 NIBP Hardware Failure NIBP A D failure detected 985 NIBP Overpressure Circuit not Programmed The overpressure circuit is not set to the current patient size 986 NIBP Overpressure Circuit not Tracking The two pressure transducers are not tracking each other 987 Stop Hardware Overpressure Excessive cuff pressure detected by hardware over pressure sen sor A triple beep tone is generated 988 TEMP Bad Calibration Thermometer needs calibration 990
35. Range Adult Mode 55 to 260 mmHg Pediatric Mode 55 to 160 mmHg Neonatal Mode 45to 120 mmHg Diastolic Pressure Readout Number of Digits 3 Accuracy Mean error less than 5 mmHg Standard deviation less than 8 mmHg Range Adult Mode 30 to 200 mmHg Pediatric Mode 30 to 150 mmHg Neonatal Mode 25 to 100 mmHg Tested per ANSI AAMI SP10 1992 methods Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications Revised 12 20 00 NIBP Measurement Cycle Time Less than 30 seconds average at 80 BPM with 180mmHg pump up pressure without retries motion artifact or arrhythmia with standard adult cuff on a healthy individual Cycle time is affected by arm size and wrapping technique Pulse Rate Range 35 245 BPM for Adult and Pediatric 70 245 BPM for Neonate Display Resolution 1 BPM Accuracy 3 BPM or 3 whichever is greater Maximum Cuff Pressure Two means of limiting cuff pressure are provided a hardware over pressure monitor which limits the pressure to 330mmHg for Adults 220mmHg for Pediatrics and 165mmHg for Neonates A software overpressure monitor which vents if the pressure exceeds 300mmHg for Adults and 200mmHg for Pediatrics If the hardware over pressure circuit is tripped in normal operation then the unit must be turned off and back on to reset the system Inflation Source This inflation source is capable of supplying sufficient air to bring a volume of 700cc s to a pressure of 300 mmHg in no more than
36. This can be caused by technique errors Not keeping the button pressed throughout the measurement Not scanning side to side adults and pediatrics Twisting or rotating the probe instead of scanning side to side Not changing the protective optical film cover with each reading Even on the same patient Debris on the lens Not covering the opening of the ear canal Presence of a visible wax plug or dense hair blocking the view into the ear canal This can also be caused by low battery voltage AccuTemp Error Reason AccuTemp double beeps and displays while holding the Start button The AccuTemp then powers down Battery voltage lt 5 7 VDC Battery requires replacement AccuTemp double beeps while holding the Start button Low battery condition Battery voltage is between 6 2 and 5 7 VDC AccuTemp displays 0 E o1 while holding the Start button Return AccuTemp for service Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information Added 6 25 99 4 8 Added 6 25 99 4 5 4 4 Maintenance The AccuTemp can be wiped down with any hospital approved disinfectant including bleach With normal use the only maintenance required is to keep the lens on the end of the probe clean The lens is made of polycarbonate Dirt greasy films or moisture on the lens will interfere with the passage of infrared heat and affect the ac
37. oe x 0155 00 0860 04 IC D81239 Micromanager U19 Transceiver 0155 00 0872 01 IC 81240 3 Terminal 4V Regulator Low Power 0155 00 0875 02 IC AD7528 DUAL 8 BIT U22 MULTIPLYING DAC ENO 34 37 IC 74ACT175 QUAD D FLIP FLOP 38 39 0155 00 0916 02 IC 74HCT374 OCTAL D TYPE FLIP U41 U43 U46 FLOP W TRISTATE OUTPUTS 0155 00 0947 02 IC 74ACT623 OCTAL BUS U30 U34 TRANSCEIVER TRI STATE aos NON INVERTING 0155 00 0948 02 0155 00 0950 02 0155 00 0876 01 IC SP720 ESD PROTECTION ARRAY 14 CIRCUIT IC SP723 ESD PROTECTION ARRAY 6 CIRCUIT ENHANCED 0155 00 0951 02 628512 STATIC 512K X8 U4 U5 LOW POWER 0155 00 1681 02 IC AMEG LP SRAM 512K X 8 Alternate for U4 and U5 0155 00 0952 02 U32 U38 U40 U39 IC 74HCT123 DUAL RETRIGGERABLE MONOSTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR d 0155 00 0955 02 IC 74HCT125 QUAD U18 U100 _ BUFFER LINE DRIVER WITH TRI STATE OUTPUTS 0155 00 0962 03 IC DS1642 NONVOLATILE U28 TIMEKEEPING RAM 0136 00 0154 Socket SMD 32 pin PLCC XU3 XU27 0158 05 0009 CRYSTAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR Y2 W TRISTATE 16 00MHZ 1 E 0283 00 0056 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC C3 C4 C12 C18 C20 C23 C25 C41 C43 C56 C64 20 0 1UF 67 68 71 76 83 85 88 90 92 93 96 C98 C100 C106 C107 0110 C112 52 0286 00 2102 CAPACITOR SMD
38. to verify printer integrity Substitute printer with a know good device to confirm diagnosis 4 5 4 Clinical Issues 4 5 4 1 Multiple Temperature Measurements The AccuTemp employs an easy and quick method to taking temperature measurements Because of this it is tempting to take immediate repetive measurements However taking immediate repetitive measurements in the same ear may result in a decrease in temperature This is because the probe of an ear thermometer is cooler than the ear canal and will draw the heat from the ear canal cooling the canal slightly Waiting a few minutes before taking another temperature in the same ear will give the ear canal time to recover and the readings should be consistent with the initial measurement 4 5 4 2 How the AccuTemp Measures Arterial Temperature adults pediatrics The AccuTemp is a self calibrating infrared ear thermometer that accurately measures the infrared heat energy radiating from the ear canal opening The AccuTemp determines the highest temperature in the ear canal opening measures the ambient temperature and then calculates arterial core temperature through its patented heat balance system This measurement will respond instantly to changes in arterial temperature without the delays and artifacts inherent in oral and rectal methods providing the means to identify a fever faster and more reliably than other methods Temperature gradients in the ear canal vary with the amount of envir
39. 0043 p Speaker with Cable 0012 00 0257 05 Tone Processor Board shown but not used in all versions Tone Processor Board 0670 00 1134 J5 P1 Recorder circuit board 0670 00 0583 6801 00 2100 euoud Captive Cable soldered to the Communication Circuit board Header Connector External Communication Circuit board 0670 00 0661 01 J3 Captive Cable Soldered to Communication Circuit board KEYPADS GRAPHIC OVERLAYS Units with Trend display and No SpO2 0331 00 0102 gt 0330 00 0026 Units with Trend display and SpO2 0331 00 0103 gt 0330 00 0027 XX Units without Trend display and No SpO2 0331 00 0104 gt 0330 00 0025 XX J8 J1 J6 CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without SpO2 J3 J2 J7 Gabi Captive Cable HE MD z Soldered to CPU Circuit board Male Female Oke UC tees a croit Done 2012900059 uoneoiunulul02 edoosejeq 0601 00 2100 uid 6 BuJ91X3 UUOD eoeyelu Datascope 2 12554 25 agi at mhi 53k gt Circuit Board 8 3049 D e 3 3 Batter
40. 0150 00 0060 03 Readout DS7 DS9 RED SEVEN SEGMENT LED 0 56 14 0151 00 0013 Transistor 2N3906 PNP General Q8 Q9 Purpose 15 0151 00 0035 Transistor 2N3904 NPN General Q7 Purpose 16 0151 00 0190 Transistor SMD Channel TMOS Q1 Q3 Q5 FET 2N7002 17 0153 00 0175 Diode SMD General Purpose D3 D5 Switching D914 18 0153 00 0177 Diode 1N5817 Schottky Rectifier D1 D2 19 0155 00 0518 IC Multiprotocol Processor U1 MC68302 20 0155 00 0645 IC Dual JFET OPAMP 032 U23 21 0155 00 0692 IC 74 08 Quad 2 Input and Gate U31 22 0155 00 0696 IC 74HCT74 Flip Flop Dual D Type U47 U48 Positive Edge Triggered 23 0155 00 0711 01 IC Octal Buffer Line Driver U2 U6 U37 74HCT244 24 0155 00 0731 01 IC Quad 2 Input NOR Gate U20 U13 U16 74HCT02 26 0155 00 0741 IC TLC555C Timer Low Power U33 27 0155 00 0772 01 IC Quad 2 Input NAND w Schmitt U14 U15 Trigger Input 74HC132 28 0155 00 0778 IC Audio Power Amplifier LM386 U25 29 0155 00 0779 IC Low Power Dual OPAMP LM358 U24 30 0155 00 0782 01 IC 1 OF 8 Decoder Multiplexer U11 74HCT138 31 0155 00 0813 01 IC Octal D Flipflop w Reset U7 74HCT273 32 0155 00 0816 01 IC 74HCT139 Dual 2 4 Line U12 U29 Decoder Demultiplexer 33 0155 00 0851 IC 7218A 8 Digit LED Display Driver U8 U10 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 31 hoe ae a ee RE ee ee 0 C fie UU P n en nr us 2 s s i SS
41. 0805 CERAMIC C103 C105 C108 C109 100V 5 1000 0286 00 2151 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC C2 C99 C104 100V 5 150PF CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC C1 X7R 20 0 0022UF CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 0 001UF 0287 00 0222 0287 00 1102 C59 X7R 10 0 01UF ee NM re X7R 10 0 022UF X7R 5 0 22UF C94 0289 00 3476 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM C77 2096 4 7UF 6 32 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM 20 1UF ae CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 04 Item Part Number Description Reference No 61 0289 00 3476 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM C7 C9 20 47UF 62 0289 01 2106 CAPACITOR SMD C63 ELECTROLYTIC 20 10UF 63 0289 01 2226 CAPACITOR SMD C61 C62 ELECTROLYTIC 20 22UF 64 0289 01 4226 CAPACITOR SMD C11 C65 C80 ELECTROLYTIC 20 22UF 65 0289 01 4476 CAPACITOR SMD C5 C6 C10 C81 ELECTROLYTIC 2096 47UF 66 0289 01 5107 CAPACITOR SMD C66 ELECTROLYTIC 20 100UF 67 0307 20 2202 RESISTOR SPECIAL NETWORK RN1 RN4 15 ELEMENT BUSSED 1 22 0K 68 0307 21 1000 RESISTOR NETWORK 8 RN6 RN8 RN10 ELEMENT ISOLATED 100 ohm 69 0324 00 0100 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R28 R30 1 4W 5 10 70 0324 00 0101 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R14 R23 R24 1 4W 5 100 71 0324
42. 2 1 Selecting the Patient Size The Patient Size is selected using the PATIENT SETUP key 37 1 Press the PATIENT SETUP key 37 to select the Patient size Three choices are available Adult Pediatric and Neonate Each time the key is pressed the patient size changes The indicator under the Adult Pediatric Neonate tie PATIENT SETUP graphic of the patient size illuminates to indicate which size is selected The factory default setting for the Patient size is Adult See section 1 3 15 User Configuration to set a custom default setting NOTE Do not press and hold the PATIENT SETUP key to change the patient size Pressing and holding this key enter the initial cuff inflation pressure change mode Figure 1 8 Patient Size Graphics and Indicators 1 3 2 2 Cuff Inflation Pressure The initial cuff inflation pressure depends on the Patient Size setting The initial cuff inflation pressures are listed in the table below The initial cuff inflation pressures can be modified from the default custom or factory settings When the Accutorr Plus is powered down these modifications are deleted 1 To change the initial cuff inflation pressure press and hold the PATIENT SETUP key 37 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds The current initial cuff pressure for the selected patient size displays in the MAP display Use the Patient Info Up and Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to change the pressure Once
43. 35 seconds If the cuff is not inflated to the desired pressure within 60 seconds then the cuff is vented and a retry cycle is initiated Leak Rate With the bleed valve closed the maximum pressure drop shall be 10 mmHg in 90 seconds measured with a 700cc volume at a differential pressure of 250 mmHg Cuff Vent Rate When the unit is vented a volume of at least 700 cc s is reduced from a pressure of 250 mmHg to a pressure of 20 mmHg in a maximum of 14 seconds Revised 06 25 99 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications Temperature Predictive Range Display Resolution Accuracy Datascope SpO2 Range Display Resolution Display Update Calibration Accuracy Datascope Pulse Rate Range Pulse Rate Accuracy Nellcor 5 2 Range Display Resolution Display Update Calibration Accuracy Nellcor Pulse Rate Range Pulse Rate Accuracy 90 110 F 32 43 C 0 1 F 0 1 C Meets ASTM E1112 86 for accuracy 40 100 SpO2 1 SpO2 Less than 4 seconds Factory Calibrated to Functional Saturation 2 from 70 100 SpO2 4 from 60 69 SpO2 unspecified from 40 59 SpO2 30 to 250 BPM 3 BPM or 3 of the reading whichever is greater 40 100 SpO2 1 SpO2 Less than 4 seconds Automatic 2 digits from 70 100 2 Adult 3 digits from 70 100 SpO2 Neonates unspecified from 40 69 SpO2 21 to 249 BPM 3 BPM Neonatal accuracy specifications are based upon testin
44. 600hz Central Station The microcontroller has control over the external serial communications with CSTAT and RS232ENB The board includes a connector shared with the RS232 for connection to an interface PCB This interface includes RD TD RTS and CTS for communication VBULK which is the main battery voltage VCC for logic drive CSTAT for control of the interface status and DGND VBULK is capable of supplying 1 watt of power to this module 2 2 2 NIBP Module Linear Bleed Overview The NIBP module contains only che Pneumatic and the Analog circuits The NIBP module is controlled by the CPU on the LED CPU module All analog signals are converted by an on board serial A D converter and sent serially to the CPU for processing The NIBP module in conjunction with the LED CPU module measures the blood pressure non invasively using an inflatable cuff and the oscillometric principle The NIBP module is controlled by the CPU where it inflates the cuff bleeds down the cuff pressure during measurement and engages the dump valve which relieves cuff pressure at the conclusion of the measurement It monitors the air pressure in the cuff via a pressure transducer It is from this signal both AC and DC components that it determines the NIBP of the patient via the oscillometric principle Safety features include a hardware over pressure limit set to the corresponding limit depending on patient size selected via the control panel This hard
45. ANGLE W EJECTOR 11 0136 91 0004 CONNECTOR PC HEADER RIGHT ANGLE LOCKING J4 AND POLARIZED 12 13 14 0153 00 0209 DIODE MBRS130LT3 SCHOTTKY POWER RECTIFIER CR5 CR6 30V 15 0153 00 0210 DIODE MBRS1100 SCHOTTKY POWER RECTIFIER CR4 100V 16 0155 00 0791 01 IC QUAD 2 INPUT NAND GATE 74HCTOO U3 17 0155 00 0950 02 IC SP723 ESD PROTECTION ARRAY 6 CIRCUIT U5 ENHANCED 18 0155 00 0974 01 IC LT1373 SWITCHING REGULATOR 1 5A U4 19 0155 00 1007 01 IC HCPL2212 OPTOCOUPLER LOGIC OUTPUT U2 20 0155 00 1007 02 IC HCPL2232 OPTOCOUPLER LOGIC OUTPUT U1 21 22 23 0286 03 2102 CAPACITOR SMD 1206 CERAMIC 100V 5 1000PF C8 24 0287 00 1103 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 0 01UF C23 C24 C25 C26 25 0287 00 1104 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 0 1UF C1 C2 C3 C5 C7 26 0289 02 3107 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH MODE 100UF C6 C17 16V 27 0289 02 4476 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH MODE 47UF C18 20V 28 29 0289 02 6106 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH MODE 10UF C12 C13 35V 30 0289 02 6226 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH MODE 22UF C14 C15 35V 31 0289 02 7106 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH MODE 10UF C16 50V 32 0325 01 1001 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 1 0 1206 1K R3 R5 R8 33 0325 01 1002 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 1 0 1206 10K R1 R2 R6 R9 34 0325 01 4640 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 1 0 1206 464 R11 35 0325 01 5111 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 1 0 1206 5 11K R10 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revi
46. Battery Test for Accutorr Plus 7 7 1 Low Battery Indicator and Low Battery Cut Off 7 7 2 Set the Current Time 7 8 NIBP Normal Operation 7 9 Trend Memory Initialization 7 10 SpO2 Normal Operation Accutorr Plus with SpO2 only Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 9 20 07 Chapter 7 Calibration Status and Error Code Table The Accutorr Plus uses the various displays on the front panel to display the operational status Error codes listed below can generally be resolved by the user however error codes with an asterisk may require resolution by a qualified technical service person TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION REASON NIBP 8810 Retry Unable to Measure Motion artifact cycle time out weak pulsations or no pulsa tions A triple beep tone is generated 8811 Retry Pump Higher Insufficient cuff pressure A triple beep tone is generated 8812 Stop Cuff Overpressure Excessive cuff pressure detected by the software A triple beep tone is generated 8813 Stop Unable to Measure 4 successive measurement attempts failed A triple beep tone is generated 8830 Check Probe Tissue contact may have been lost 8831 Replace Probe Defective probe or connection 8832 Battery Low The 9V battery needs replacement 8850 No Sensor No sensor connected 8851 Sensor Off Sensor not on patient Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8852
47. CLEAR Press the ROOM BED key again The Figure 1 9 Room Number and Bed Letter BED LED flashes Keys and Indicators Press the Patient Info Up or Down Arrow key 27 amp 28 to increment or decrement the bed letter Press the ROOM BED key a third time to exit this mode or do not press the key for 15 seconds Once measurements have been taken and the unit is powered off and on the room number and bed letter will default to the lowest room and bed where data is currently stored Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 3 MANUAL NIBP MEASUREMENTS AND GENERAL NIBP MEASUREMENT INFORMATION 1 Select a pressure cuff that is appropriate for the size of the patient Use the chart below as a guideline Limb Circumference cm Description Cuff Name Datascope Part Number Disposable Cuffs Latex Free 30 45 Large Adult 0683 07 0001 01 24 36 Adult 0683 07 0001 02 18 27 Child 0683 07 0001 03 16 25 Small Child 0683 07 0001 04 Disposable Neonatal Cuffs box of 10 Approximate Limb Circumference Size 0 5 8 0683 03 0004 01 Size 1 7 10 0683 03 0001 01 Size 2 9 13 cm 0683 03 0002 01 Size 3 12 17 cm 0683 03 0003 01 Color Coded Cuffs Reusable Cuffs 45 66 Thigh Tan 0998 00 0003 36 30 47 Large Adult Gray 0998 00 0003 35 24 36 Adult Brown 0998 00 0003 34 18 27 Child Red 0998 00 0003 33 6 11 New Born Blue 0998 00 0003 3 1 Infant 0998 00 0003 32
48. Control Register Systolic lt gt gt sPo2RST lt ACONLED lt lt 25 12 150N CHRGOFF Keypad Port WR_LED3 Configuration Port spoz HOME 3 PRED IMP WRRECD Seg k RECD RUM RECD Digi k HL LOW RESET LCD VCC WR RECD Data D 15V T oV ACONLED 0 sP02 SR VAN N SPO2 4 Volt gt Regulator _ SPO2RST en Power Supply VBULK Over OFFION s RTC Wi 3 CHRGOFF lt D Latch 4kX8 NVRAM 2 015 u28 NIBP POWER N OVPR X Disable F 5 lt 7 Valve amp lt 512k x 16 _tvolts ao Pump U4 U5 2 12 volts 2 Control LES U13 U14 U16 26 y Flash RST ON OFFSW Memory SER DI Aer nds 512k x 16 SER_DO lt U3 U27 SER_CLK SPCLK 7 T SCP cpu Dual D A Audio Volume Control amp CONTROL 13 CLKEN 5 gt O 68302 Converter gt Speaker Driver Circuitry 022 024 025 From 12 Volt Battery 7 CLEAR 2 Microcontroller E PART OF 11 gt DART 166 View Ange 00 Tx
49. DS10 D 12 are 7 segment 0 56 high green LEDs DS13 DS15 are 4 digit 7 segment 0 28 high red LEDs with a upper and lower colon The driver lines for DS10 DS12 are latched and driven by individual 74HC374A with each output driving a segment through current limiting resistors sized for the mcd intensity of each color The data is latched by using a 74HC123 inverted output is used to latch the data The trigger is the multiplexed anode line from the Maxim IC and the output state change is delayed a minimum of 40uS and a maximum of 200uS This will enable the latch from 10 to 50 into the multiplx line The discrete LEDs on the keypad are driven by WR LED3 which is located on the keypad For the purpose of design control the device is contained within these design documents This device is used to illuminate the individual LEDs on the keypad The timing and function is the same as above The display controllers are 8 bit devices located on the odd address locations defined in Appendix A2 An additional data bus line D8 is used to enable the display drivers for the SpO2 and Heart Rate The bit is written to by either the control or data registars The device is enabled by a high signal on D8 that is clocked in by RST WR LED 0 2 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Keypad interface The keypad is made up of a 3 x 8 matrix of keys U6 will monitor the array of 8 keys It is pulled up and when a
50. IC 12 BIT MULTI DAC AD7541A U29 17 0155 00 0633 IC BI FET SMP HLD LF398 U13 18 0155 00 0635 01 IC MICRO MONITOR U35 19 0155 00 0645 IC OPAMP TL032 U8 U9 U22 20 0155 00 0714 IC HEX INVERTER 74HCT04 U30 21 0155 00 0716 TLO82CD U1 U2 U11 22 0155 00 0717 IC PRECISION OP AMP U6 U7 23 0155 00 0718 IC LM 337LM U28 24 0155 00 0719 IC LM317LM U27 25 0155 00 0720 01 IC DG201 QUAD SPST ANALOG U3 U5 U10 U12 SW 26 0155 00 0721 03 IC 32KX8 STATIC RAM U18 27 0155 00 0753 IC COMPARATOR LM 311 U36 28 0155 00 0822 01 IC TRI STATE OCTAL 74HCT534 U33 U39 U40 29 0155 00 0901 03 IC DUART SCC2692AC1A44 U14 30 0155 90 0235 IC PROGRAMMED PLD 9101 U24 Blank chip is 0155 00 0494 12 EP910ILC 15 31 0155 90 0297 IC PROGRAMMED FLASH ROM U26 Blank chip is 0155 00 0634 01 To be socketed AM29F010 90JC 32 0155 90 0298 IC PROGRAMMED PLD EPM7032 U23 Blank chip is 0155 00 0673 11 EPM7032LC44 15 33 0158 07 0012 CRYSTAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR U31 34 0158 08 0005 Xtal SMD 3 6864 MHz Y1 35 0283 00 0056 CAP 1UF BYPASS C6 24 C30 34 C36 38 C41 36 0283 04 0474 CAP 47 UF 50V 10 CER C1 5 37 0285 08 8201 CAP 0082uF POLYPROPYLENE _ C68 38 0285 15 0104 CAP POLYCARB 1UF 63V 2 5 C58 60 C65 38 0285 15 2104 CAP POLYCARB 1UF 50V 1 C58 60 C65 Alternate 39 0285 15 0223 CAP POLYCARB 022 UF 100V 2 5 C61 63 C66 39 0285 15 2223 POLYCARB 022 UF 75V 1 C61 63 C66 Alternate 40 0286 00 2101 CAP 100PF 100V 5 CER C49 41 0286 00 2102 CAP 1000P
51. LOADING LABEL The Recorder Paper Loading label is designed to be placed on the recorder module Attach label as shown in the figure below Figure 1 23 Placement of Recorder Paper Loading Label 154 Reed 020800 Acutorr Plus Service Manual apter 1 Operation 2 0 THEORY OF OPERATION CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER 2 1 Block Diagrams 2 2 Detailed Circuit Description The Theory of Operation provides block diagrams of major operational circuits an overview of each circuit board and functional descriptions of the major sections on that board The information presented is intended to assist qualified service personnel to isolate faults to the lowest functional sub assembly and replacement of the same 2 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS The system level block diagram illustrates the major functional modules and their interdependence More detailed diagrams for particular functional modules are provided within the Theory of Operation Block Diagrams Page Interconnect Diagrams LED CPU Board Block Diagram NIBP Block Diagram Recorder Module Control Logic Block Diagram Predicative Temperature Module Block Diagram Datascope SpO2 Block Diagram Communication Board Block Diagram LCD inverter Module Block Diagram Nellcor MP304 Block Diagram Nellcor Interface Board Block Diagram Masimo Interface Board Block Diagram Tone Processor Board Block Diagram Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation
52. MODE C4 C5 C98 C99 100UF 22 0289 02 5336 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH MODE 33UF C8 C10 23 0325 01 1001 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 1 1206 1K R3 R5 R7 24 0325 01 1002 RESISTOR THIN FILM 1 8W 1 1206 10K R1 R2 R6 25 26 27 0361 00 0752 Support Post PCB Lock Mount Nylon 28 0361 09 0402 Standoff Broaching type PCB 29 0388 00 0675 PCB Nellcor Interface Board 30 31 0060 00 0979 01 Module Specification Nellcor Interface Board 32 0060 00 0979 02 Design Documentation Nellcor Interface Board 33 0060 00 0979 03 Worst Case Analysis Nellcor Interface Board 34 0060 00 0979 05 Design Validation Nellcor Interface Board 35 0060 00 0979 06 Production Test Specification Nellcor Interface Board 6 42 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 2 0014 00 0229 POWER SUPPLY ISOLATED DC DC CONVERTER 5V 1 5V 3 0108 00 0092 INDUCTOR FIXED 150UH L1 4 0108 11 0100 INDUCTOR MOLDED SURFACE MOUNT 1812 10UH 1213 5 6 0136 00 0201 CONNECTOR PC TEST POINT TP1 TP9 7 0136 00 0299 06 CONNECTOR SMT PASS THRU RECEPTACLE 100 x J5 100 8 0136 00 0302 CONNECTOR SMT HEADER 100 x 100 J6 9 0136 85 0014 CONNECTOR PC HEADER SHROUDED RIGHT J2 ANGLE W EJECTOR 10 0136 85 0010 CONNECTOR PC HEADER SHROUDED RIGHT J1
53. N 25 20 oxygen transducer NELLCOR SENSOR FAMILY SELECTION GUIDE D25 D25L Adult R 15 Adult N 25 Neonatal 1 20 Infant D 20 Pediatric RS 10 Adult Patient Size gt 30 kg gt 50 kg lt 3 kg gt 40 kg 1 20 kg 10 50 kg gt 40 kg Duration of Use Short or Long Term Short or Long Term Short or Long Term Short or Long Term Short or Long Term Short Term Sterility Sterile Sterile Sterile Sterile Sterile Non sterile Patient Activity Limited Activity Inactive Limited Activity Limited Activity Limited Activity Limited Activity OXISENSOR adult digit oxygen transducer OXISENSOR adult nasal oxygen transducer OXISENSOR neonatal oxygen transducer OXISENSOR infant digit oxygen transducer OXISENSOR pediatric digit oxygen transducer RS 10 reflectance oxygen transducer In an unopened undamaged package NELLCOR accessories and sensors must be purchased form NELLCOR Inc 25495 Whitehall Street Hayward Ca 94545 To contact NELLCOR call 1 800 NELLCOR D Automatic Calibration of NELLCOR Sensors The oximetry subsystem incorporates automatic calibration mechanisms It is automatically calibrated each time it is turned on at periodic intervals thereafter and whenever a new sensor is connected Also the intensity of the sens
54. R87 63 0326 01 1333 RES 133K 1 1W R4 64 0326 01 1472 RES 14 7K 1 1W R47 65 0326 01 1502 RES 15K 1 1W R43 66 0326 01 1503 RES 150K 1 1W R39 R41 R52 R58 R60 R66 R73 R83 R84 67 0326 01 1621 RES 1 62K 1 1W R68 R92 68 0326 01 1652 RES 16 5K 1 1W R37 69 0326 01 2003 RES 200K 1 1W R8 70 0326 01 2320 RES 232 ohm 1 1W R76 R89 71 0326 01 3013 RES 301K 1 1W R80 72 0326 01 3241 RES 3 24K 1 1W R25 73 0326 01 3742 RES 37 4K 1 1W R88 74 0326 01 3922 RES 39 2K 1 1W R29 R57 75 0326 01 3923 RES 392K 1 1W R18 R31 76 0326 01 4750 RES 475 1 1W R108 77 0326 01 4751 RES 4 75K 1 1W R13 78 0326 01 4752 RES 47 5K 1 1W R53 R63 79 0326 01 4753 RES 475K 1 1W R26 80 0326 01 5111 RES 5 11K 1 1W R32 R48 81 0326 01 6653 RES 665K 1 1W R5 82 0326 02 1002 RES 10K 1 1W R19 R20 R35 R50 R54 83 0388 00 0593 PCB SpO2 84 0212 12 0403 Screw Pan Head 85 0406 00 0693 Bracket Not used in 03 boards 86 0349 00 0276 Insulator SpO2 Not used in 03 boards 87 0153 00 0197 Diode Suppressor D6 7 8 9 88 0361 09 0402 PEM SS Standoff KFSE 440 4 89 0136 57 0085 PLCC Socket XU34 90 0136 22 0040 01 Test Point TP6 TP7 Accouter Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 18 00 6 29 LCD Backlite Power Supply Board 0670 00 0649 Part Number Description Reference No 1 0014 00 0180 Power Supply DC to AC inverter T1 ERG 12
55. The Predictive Thermometer PCB consists of 2 68HC705C8A microcontrollers MCU IC s U4 and U3 MCU U2 is provided by Sherwood Medical and its software program converts the thermistor output signal to a seven segment code used to drive a display The second MCU U3 software program converts the seven segment code to a serial TTL level signal that is isolated from the main Accutorr Monitor via opto isolators Block Diagram An overall block diagram of the Predictive Thermometer PCB is shown below The Predictive Thermometer PCB consists mainly of a differential amplifier ICL7612 an A D converter ADC0834B and 2 microcontroller IC s that convert the analog signal of the input temperature probe to a serial TTL level signal Software Control The determination and processing software within the module is adapted under license from an outside vendor as part of U4 Software control of data communicated to the LED CPU board for further processing and display control 5V THERM LCAL BRIDGE AMPLIFIER THERM IN 45V 2 a LOW CAL 4 99 ADJ R1 Predictive Probe VREG i 2 5V H CLK Housing swi 4 REF osc Connector U1 Y1 5V Low Voltage 9V Battery Detect U6 i Power Ground i Source SWIT_GND Current Switch Q1
56. The board supports the CIS HI DIAP interface via RS 232E provides a feed through path for the Datascope proprietary download connector DC DC converter for the 12 Vdc 100 mA required for wireless telemetry controlled by the CPU and includes the driver for an external isolation relay that is activated by Nurse Call future option The RS 232E interface used for DIAP is implemented using a Maxim MAX239 Multi Channel Transceiver U2 This chip has a minimum 10 volt output signal level which provides safe operating margin above the 5 volt minimum RS 232 operating signal level Communications is to support a 5 wire interface 4 signals and a ground The signals are described below All RS 232 signal are ESD protected by a U3 an SM14M24C Transient Voltage Suppressor array The 12 Vdc power required by the MAX239 is supplied from the on board DC DC converter In addition the MAX239 requires 5 Vdc for the internal logic This is supplied as an input to the communications module The MAX239 receivers are controlled by logic signal CSTAT Logic 0 enables the receivers other wise they are tri stated The RS 232 signals appear on connector J2 a dual row 5 pin header which will have a mating 10 pin pendant ribbon cable attached The other end of the ribbon cable assembly is a 9 pin panel mount D connector Included on this connector are pins for the future Nurse Call option See chart for pinout The Accutorr Plus software is upgradable
57. Trend Screen and SpO Accutorr Plus Service Manual Introduction 2 0 2 1 2 2 Revised 12 20 00 1 3 6 3 1 3 7 1 3 8 1 3 9 1 3 10 1 3 10 1 1 3 10 2 1 3 10 3 1 3 11 1 3 11 1 1 3 11 2 1 3 11 3 1 3 11 4 1 3 12 1 3 13 1 3 14 1 3 15 1 3 16 1 3 17 1 3 18 1 3 19 To Delete the Stored Measurements on all Models of the Accutorr Plus Setting the Alarm Volume and Beep Volume Setting the LCD Contrast View Angle Adjustment Display Time Out Mode SpO2 Measurements Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 1 33 Datascope Pulse Oximetry Sensors Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Nellcor Pulse Oximetry Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Masimo Pulse Oximetry Temperature Measurement optional Predictive Thermometer Measurements How to Apply Probe Cover PTM How to Take Oral Rectal and Axillary Temperatures 1 44 Storing Temperature Measurements Recorder optional How to Set the Clock Date and Time Battery Operation User Configuration Status and Error Codes How to Attach Optional Thermometer and Recorder Modules Placement of the Quick Reference Card Placement of Recorder Paper Loading Label THEORY OF OPERATION Block Diagrams Detailed Circuit Descriptions 2 2 1 2 211 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 222 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 2 2 2 8 2 2 9 2 2 10 LED CPU Module 0670 00 0650 03 04 Hardware Overview Software Overview Detailed Hardware Description NIBP Module Linear Ble
58. and press the NIBP Start key to activate the test This test prints out a pattern on the recorder if a recorder module is attached A strip similar to figure 7 3 will be printed X Gg gn Qo TIJZAX ouw yy 2 9 TEN 1ZA8 MinLssid 943503908 f 168 29GpE210 aor lt a amp amp Figure 7 3 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 5 6 1 Recorder Print Head Adjustment NOTE This test and adjustment is performed only after a new printhead is installed 1 Disconnect the printhead ribbon cable from the connector Check the oscillator frequency at TP 1 the recorder control board Proper frequency selection is determined by the printhead sensitivity The sensitivity rank is marked on the bottom side of the printhead flex cable near the 90 bend in the cable See table 7 5 Print Head Rank Oscillator Output KHz Minimum Maximum A 9 7 10 9 B 10 5 121 C 11 6 13 4 Table 7 5 3 Adjust R 1 to the correct frequency PRECAUTION Increasing printbead operating frequency beyond the specified limits will shorten the printhead life or result in immediate permanent damage Reconnect the printhead ribbon cable and run test strip to confirm proper print density The print density is equally dependent on the printhead temperature as well as on the sensitivity of the chart
59. and store on the side of the Accutorr Plus rolling stand using the optional cable retainer For accessory part number information see Section 5 2 Optional Accessories Avoid running any cart bed or any piece of equipment over the sensor cable Avoid strong pulls on the sensor cable 10 Ibs Akg Watch for cracks in the DATASENSOR housing Watch for cracks cuts rips fogging or signs of moisture in the FLEXISENSOR SD E Sensor Performance For the BEST performance DO NOT PLACE any sensor on an extremity with an arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff in place Placement of an arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff on an extremity may obstruct normal blood flow False pulse rate information may result if the FLEXISENSOR SD is placed on that same extremity Place the sensor on the limb opposite the site of the arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff Encourage the patient to remain still Patient motion may affect the sensor s performance If it is not possible for the patient to remain still replace the sensor bandage on the FLEXISENSOR SD to assure good adhesion or change the site of the DATASENSOR Check the DATASENSOR site every 2 hours and check the FLEXISENSOR SD site every 8 hours for indications of skin abrasions sensor displacement sensor damage or circulation impairment Check the sensor site every 4 hours if the ear clip is used If necessary remove and reapply the sensor If any of the above mentioned indicati
60. cradle houses a small circuit board and a photocell sensor 4 6 17 Communication Board 45 1 Disconnect the rear panel 9 pin RS232 connector 2 Disconnect the 3 pin connector on the top of the Communication Board leading to the phone jack by the rear panel Remove the 3 mounting screws securing the Communication Board to the chassis Trace the wider ribbon cable remove the NIBP shield to the CPU Board Disconnect the connector NOTE The keyboard may have to be removed for clearance Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 4 Repair Information This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information 5 0 ASSEMBLY AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS Schematic drawings and accompanying assembly drawings of printed circuit boards are provided in the remainder of this chapter The following is a list of the drawings and the corresponding drawing number if available and the page where it can be found Drawing Name Interconnect Diagram Masimo Interconnect Diagram Predictive Thermometer Board Assembly Predictive Thermometer Board Schematic with Battery Schematic Predictive Thermometer Board Recorder Board Assembly Recorder Board Schematic NIBP Board Assembly NIBP Board Schematic Datascope SpO2 Board Assembly Datascope SpO2 Board Schematic LCD Backlite Power Supply Board Assembly LCD Backlite Power Supply Board Schematic CPU Board with and without SpO2 A
61. even if the unscheduled measurement coincides with the scheduled measurement INTERVAL mode is active and the DEFLATE key 36 is pressed The INTERVAL INDICATOR 35 flashes No additional measurements will be taken until the START NIBP key 38 is pressed If a timed measurement is in progress the measurement is suspended and the cuff deflates INTERVAL mode is active and the interval time is changed The measurement cycle is reset with the new interval A measurement will be taken after the new interval time has elapsed Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 5 ALARMS The Accutorr Plus provides HI and LO alarm limit settings for systolic diastolic MAP pulse rate and SpO An alarm violation occurs when one or more patient parameters equals or falls outside the limits that have been specified 1 3 5 1 Setting Alarm Limits The Factory Default for all parameter alarms except Low SpO2 is OFF The Low SpO2 factory default is 86 The User Configuration mode can be used to set custom defaults See section 1 3 15 User Configuration for details The factory and custom defaults for alarms can be changed as required to accommodate the needs of individual patients The SET ALARMS key 29 and the Patient Info Up and Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 are used to set alarm values 1 Press the SET ALARMS key 29 1 beep to enter into the alarm set mode The first time this key is pressed all NIBP displays blank excep
62. initial start up temperature of 85 0 F should be displayed Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 01 11 00 Chapter 7 Calibration 7 6 4 Temperature Verification Test Infrared Thermometer applicable only to units equipped with a temperature option Pre heat water bath to 100 F Place floating Black Body device into water bath and allow to stabilize until step 7 or a minimum of 30 seconds Prepare the thermometer for the verification process by removing any disposable probe covers Clean the probe lens with a swab dipped in alcohol Completely cover probe tip with a piece of aluminum foil from the lens to the probe neck portion Allow 5 minutes for the probe and foil to stabilize at ambient temperature Activate the thermometer by pressing the button Read the ambient temperature displayed and record the number as ____ Remove the aluminum foil Check the water bath temperature against a laboratory grade mercury thermometer with a verified accuracy of 0 4 0 2 C or better Record the water bath temperature as TT Attach a disposable probe cover to the thermometer head Insert the head into the floating Black Body cavity such that the instrument is looking into the needle shaped end Press the button to measure the temperature Record the temperature as TpCALC Select the appropriate correction factor from the following choices Core temperature correction Kcore 1 087 Oral temperature c
63. key is pressed one of those lines will go low An interrogation will commence from the MC68302 to find which key was pressed Communication Interface The Accutorr Plus Communication module provides the communication signal interface between the LED CPU board and the external communication interface connector The board supports the CIS HIS DIAP interface via RS 232E or RS 485 providing a feed through path for the Datascope proprietary download connector J1 the DC DC converter for the 12Vdc 100mA required for wireless telemetry and the RS 232 driver SpO2 Interface The SpO 2 module connects to the LED CPU module via connector J7 Power ie 15 and 5V and ground are provided by the LED CPU module The MC68302 interfaces with the SCC2692 of the SpO2 module through a TTL serial interface The SpO2 module sends serial information via signal SpO2_TXD and receives information via signal gt RXD The LED CPU module can reset the SpO2 module by asserting SpO2RST The signal SpO2 is used to provide the LED CPU with the systolic signal used to create the heart beat DAC functions U22 is a dual 8 bit DAC that interfaces to U1 MC68302 It controls the attenuation needed for the speaker driver circuitry and the amplitude of LCD drive signal VEE ie steps of 255 from 0 to 10 4 V minimum The device is selected via the CS_IO signal Power to the DAC is provided by an unboard DC DC convertor The DAC is written to when W
64. no SpO option Label front bezel w DSCP SpO2 Label front bezel w NELLCOR SpO Label front bezel w MASIMO SpO2 Chassis AC mains power inlet w cable Ground lug not used Battery sealed lead acid Battery Li Ion Battery connector with cable SLA Battery connector with cable Li Ion Cover plate cam latch Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Datascope Part Number 0103 00 0411 0008 10 0408 0380 00 0359 04 0380 00 0359 05 0380 00 0359 06 0012 00 1223 0012 00 1222 01 0012 00 1344 See Table See Table 0160 00 0034 0012 00 1089 0012 00 1085 0670 00 0650 03 0670 00 0650 04 0012 00 1238 0361 00 0164 0012 00 0257 05 0406 00 0756 0406 00 0755 0343 00 0097 0334 00 1509 01 0334 00 1509 02 0334 00 1509 03 0334 00 1509 04 0441 00 0103 0012 00 0941 0124 00 0104 06 0146 00 0043 0146 00 0069 0406 00 0754 0997 00 0944 0386 00 0212 Revised 12 20 00 6 6 Figure No 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 37a 37b 38 38a 39 40 40 406 40c 40d 41 Ala 42 43 43a 44 45 46 47 48 48 Description W asher shoulder cam latch Spring torsion cam latch Cam latch with rubber friction tape Friction strip adhesive dease handle R ear housing complete with 21 26 Interface cable N IBP to power supply Interface cable N IBP to CPU NIBP circuit module Interface cable N IBP to Filter PCB Interface cable
65. numm o RNG RBB 944 o o RA n ae BR o ooocd ooooooooooooooooooo S 9 o NB 000000000000000000000000 6 9 9 mmu 9 AES PS JE R76 2 Ai ci mm nes A57 o o o Onl o 10000000 o Tmo RSS 988 Mio 0 00000000000000000000000 rio og 9 7 8 5 R58 Bg o 22 20 B 7 MESE E o cay 047 00 BY o 52 oof hE 5 _ oo R63 5 2 99 emm 47 oo 02 388 20000004 69 R56 o o ae 9 Aid 10001000 w a um mms 886 o o 4 B 00000000 Be o o ps g o xd 18110110111 S S gp o y m TE mmmm o 99 o Eee 8g Op 00 om B 880000000000 i 88 Dg 0580000000000 sep S mmcss R28 mm R27 g Reso mmnne CPU Board bottom side 0670 00 0650 03 04 03with SpO2 04 without SpO2 Revised 12 20 00 5 22 E ite a pee 18 m a Bone umo e m y fmm en ED DECCITCDUTDTPQDLi Raat
66. over pressure sensor was activated 00 or not FF Pressing the Deflate key at any time during the test causes the NIBP module to open all valves and ends the test Following each over pressure hardware test the UUT must be turned off in order to re enable the pump Test Size Mode Target Pump Test Room Number Sub Test Patient Pressure mmHg Bed Letter Low 157 5 a Medium 210 10 b High 315 15 Table 7 7 7 5 10 Pulse Channel DC Offset Test 9a 9b 9c Select Room Number and Bed Letter per table 7 8 and press the NIBP Start key to activate the test This test measures the DC offset for each of the three electronic gain settings available on the pulse channel Results for each gain setting are displayed in the Timer Temperature display in Volts Table 7 8 describes the tests performed Test Description Acceptable Test Room Number Sub Test Patient Limit V Bed Letter Gain 1 Low Test 1 50 to 1 83 a Gain 2 Med Test 1 50 to 1 83 b Gain 3 High Test 1 50 to 1 83 Table 7 8 7 5 11 Pulse Channel Average Noise Test 10a 10b 10c Select Room Number and Bed Letter per table 7 9 and press the NIBP Start key to activate the test This test measures the average noise for each of three electronic gain settings available on the pulse channel Results for each gain setting are displayed in the Timer Temperature display in mi
67. provides RST and RST signals to initialize the processor the three EPLD s and the two communications ICs This watchdog is activated by any of a number of sources 1 a dip in the 5 volt logic supply 2 a reset from the Accutorr Plus with SpO host processor board on HSTRST or 3 lack of a strobe from a software control loop on DOG STR A 68C681 UART interface the processor to the host processor board Processor and communications shared memory consists of both static ram and flash ram DIGITAL SECTION SERIAL VF 014 M ADDRESS DECODER 3 U23 SEQUEN __ CONTROL ANALOG SECTION CER mem REGISTER RUNICAL U24 pre U17 INTERF DETECTOR U2 a Pr i 7 DIAG CURRENT DE 18HZ M PROGRA SUB PROGRA SAMPLE TO MULTI FILTER MABLE TRACTION MABLE AND 18HZ 1 PREAMP U5 Alen VOLTAGE PLEXER GAIN GAIN II HOLD U11B U11B U13 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 2 6 Main Power Supply Power supply for Sealed Lead Acid Battery The power supply is capable of operation between 85 and 264 Vac 47 to 63 Hz sinewave input source It is a fixed frequency 62 Khz flyback
68. pulse amplitude of 10096 Set the Accutorr Plus SpO HI alarm limit to 95 and the pulse rate HI alarm limit to 55 bpm Connect an NIBP cuff or a suitable simulator to the Accutorr Plus and start a measurement Confirm that the Accutorr Plus has determined an SpO2 saturation level and has violated the SpO2 HI alarm and the pulse rate HI alarm flashing digits and alarm tone Press the MUTE key to silence the alarms Check the trend screen to confirm that the measurement information has been saved Set the SpO2 HI alarm to OFF and SpO LOW alarm to 86 Set the simulator to an SpO saturation level of 90 pulse rate of 95 bpm and the pulse amplitude to approximately 10 Weak Pulse Datascope SpO only low perfusion Masimo SpO only The Accutorr Plus may intermittently determine SpO values or indicate a status code of 8853 Pulse Search or 8854 Weak Pulse Low Perfusion will display Adjust the simulators pulse amplitude up and down until either status code of 8853 or 8854 displays 9 Restore normal simulation parameters as described in step 1 10 Remove the sensor from the simulator to induce a status code of 8851 Sensor Off Datascope SpO2 or Masimo SpO only 11 Disconnect the sensor from the Accutorr Plus to produce a status code of 8850 No Sensor Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration Revised 0312502 Revised 03 25 02 Datascope Accutorr Plus J t3
69. serially to the Nellcor Interface Board 0670 00 0675 for further processing and display E U 3 Static U 6 RAM EPROM 32x8 ADDRESS BUS SERIAL RED_ADC DATA DATA BUS NELLCOR Sensor nput U 4 MC68HC16 A D_CLOCK RST Connector to NELLCOR Interface Board Y 2 32 768 Khz NELLCOR MP304 Block Diagram 0671 00 0162 Figure 2 10 Nellcor MP304 Block Diagram Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 2 10 Nellcor Interface Board Theory of Operation The Datascope to Nellcor interface circuit board establishes bi lateral communication and control of the Nellcor Oximeter circuit board The circuit board consists of a power supply section that converts 5 VDC into the logic and analog supplies required by the oximeter and optically isolated logic control for the processing circuits of the oximeter The optically isolated up converter U1 convert the 5 VDC from the main power supply into an input voltage for U6 of about 5 VDC The precision down converter U6 steps down and regulates the 5 VDC voltage for the digital sections of the oximeter circuit The optically isolated up converter U2 convert the 5 VDC to a bi polar 9 and 9 VDC input for U4 and US then regulated to 5 and 5 VDC The
70. size will be the default selection On the Accutorr Plus NIBP only press the DATA SCAN key 22 1 beep tone to exit the delete data mode NOTE The unit will also automatically delete data that is 24 hours old NOTE To delete all information for all patients press and hold the DELETE INFO key 21 while powering on the unit Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 30 1 3 7 SETTING THE ALARM VOLUME AND BEEP VOLUME TheLCD on theA ccutorr Plus models with Trend Screen is used to display the T rend List as described in section 1 3 6 It is also used to display a menu which is used to set the alarm volume and the SpO beep volume The M EN U key 8 the LCD U p and Down Arrow keys 9 amp 10 and the SELECT key 12 are used to set these volumes The User Configuration mode can be used to set custom defaults for the alarm volume and beep volume See section 1 3 15 U ser Configuration for details 1 Press the M EN U key 8 to display the menu The menu is shown in figure 3 4 The alarm volumeisinitially highlighted when the menu is displayed The highlighting indicates this item can be changed 2 Press the LCD Up and Down Arrow keys 9 amp 10 to change the current selection for the alarm volume The selections OFF 1 2 3 4 and 5 with 5 being theloudest 3 Pressthe SELECT key 11 to movethe highlighting to SpO 2 beep volume 4 PresstheLCD Up and Down Arrow keys 9 amp 10 to change the cur
71. skin when the cuff is inflated This measure may affect NIBP performance and should be used with caution When using the thigh cuff this product may not comply with product specifications listed in chapter 3 The limb circumferences of the color coded cuffs adhere to the AHA guidelines for size They also incorporate index and range lines to assist in cuff selection The cuff bladder and hose contain Natural Latex rubber The bladder has a dacron cover Revised 06 25 99 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 2 Attach the cuff hose to the NIBP cuff connector 18 To do this hold the hose behind the knurled pressure fitting female Push onto the male connector until a click is heard To remove hold the knurled female fitting and pull firmly to release Apply the cuff to the patient To reduce errors the cuff should fit snugly but with enough room for two fingers to be placed between the cuff and the patient s arm on adults and with little or no air present within the cuff Cuff should fit loosely on neonates Apply the cuff so that the center of the inflation bag bladder is over the brachial artery Be sure that the INDEX line on the cuff falls between the two RANGE lines If not a larger or smaller cuff is required Be sure the cuff lies directly against the patient s skin For best results the cuff should be placed on the arm at heart level and no clothing should come between the patient and the cuff NOTE Avo
72. specified NIBP hoses On Standby Key This key is used to activate the unit enabling it to begin taking measurements The unit does not have to be ON for the internal battery to charge However the unit does need to be plugged into an AC receptacle for the battery to be charging Memory Full Indicator This LED indicator flashes when 80 99 of the 100 available entries of trend are used This LED is on continuously when 100 are used Delete measurements manually using the DELETE INFO key or the unit will automatically delete the oldest measurement for the current patient NOTE The unit will also automatically delete data that is 24 hours old Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 21 Delete Info Key Press the Data Scan key to enable the Delete Info key Accutorr Plus without Trend and SpO2 only Once enabled press and hold this key 1 beep tone approx 3 seconds to delete the most recent reading when it is displayed When displaying any measurement press and hold this key 2 beep tones approx 6 seconds to delete all information for the currently selected patient Press and hold at power up to delete all information for all patients Data Scan Key Press this key 1 beep tone to view previous measurements for the selected patient on the Accutorr Plus NIBP and to enable the Delete Info key Accutorr Plus with out Trend and SpO2 only The LED indicator next to the key illuminate
73. the 9 pin D connector are as follows PIN INPUT OUTPUT DESCRIPTION NAME Output 12VDC 100mA TR_PWR Input RS 232 EXT_RXD Output RS 232 EXT_TXD Output 10 Vdc min Nurse_call Output Ground DGND Output Ground DGND Input RS 232 EXT RTS Output RS 232 EXT CTS Output Ground DGND AX o For Standard connection use pins 2 3 5 7 amp 8 for 5 wire communication and use pins 2 3 amp 5 for 3 wire communication For connection to a PC the cabling must be Null Modem or Signal Accutorr Plus Pin PC pin TXD RXD Ground RTS CTS Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Figure 2 9 LCD Inverter Module Block Diagram 2 2 8 LCD Inverter Module 0670 00 0649 This describes the circuit that will provide the 90 VAC required for the LCD Module back lite exitation DC to AC Inverter The system 12V signal is fed into the module on J2 1 This signal is then fed to J1 1 The inverter is powered by 12SW 12 5 volt nominal from J1 2 Once powered the inverter is designed to provide the AC waveform required by the backlight over the cabinet temperature range and 12V tolerance The output AC wave form is 90 Vrms minimum voltage The AC frequency is to be between 360Hz and 440Hz and C2 provide filtering of the inverter DC input Current Switch The 1 gate is connect
74. the Accutorr Plus NIBP Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 The numbers in parentheses refer to the items described in Section 1 2 Controls and Indicators When a described feature refers to a particular model it will be noted When the name Accutorr Plus is used it refers to all 5 models 1 3 1 SETTING UP TURNING POWER 1 Before turning the power on check the rear panel for voltage requirements Confirm proper voltage is available Before turning the power on connect any required modules recorder thermometer For instructions on connecting modules see section 1 3 17 Upon installation of any optional modules a test is required after power up step 5 For the recorder press the print key and the recorder will feed the paper to verify proper function For the Predictive thermometer remove the probe from its holder and verify 85 0 29 4 appears in the Interval Elap Time Temp display If additional communications capabilities are required attach a communications interface cable to the rear panel COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR 45 and to the corresponding interface connector on the peripheral instrument Attach the AC power cord into the rear panel AC POWER CONNECTOR 44 and into a grounded 3 prong Hospital Grade AC receptacle Do not use an adapter to defeat the ground The green AC POWER INDICATOR 16 illuminates indicating AC power has been applied T
75. the Cufflink NIBP simulator to perform the desired test Instead of pumping up the cuff this test uses the Cufflink simulator to verify the Accutorr pressure reading for the NIBP Leak Test Over Pressure test and the Main Pressure Transducer Verification Test The Accutorr displays the pressure in the MAP display Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 9 20 07 Chapter 7 Calibration Pressing the Deflate key at any time during the test causes the NIBP module to open all valves and ends the test Pressing and holding the Deflate key for three seconds clears the MAP display and exits test The Cufflink simulator must be exited separately NOTE The reading and setting accuracy will be dependent on the accuracy of the Cufflink calibration and the Accutorr Plus condition The Cufflink standard dynamic pressure simulation may produce Systolic Mean Diastolic read outs on the Accutorr Plus outside of the specified limits The pressure simulation results may not be accepted as a measure of the Accutorr Plus clinical performance 7 5 14 Over Pressure Transducer Verification 12c 12a 12b This test verifies that the over pressure transducer is calibrated correctly Calibration is checked in the Low level pressure mode so that the limit displayed in the MAP window should say 158 mmHg 1 If it does not the transducer needs to calibrated by proceeding to 7 5 16 Over pressure Transducer Calibration The over pressure transducer should also be v
76. the desired pressure is displayed press the PATIENT SETUP key 37 to enter this value NOTE Waiting 15 seconds will also enter this value PATIENT SIZE SETTING INITIAL FACTORY DEFAULT CUFF INFLATION VALUES LOWEST SELECTABLE PRESSURE HIGHEST SELECTABLE PRESSURE INCREMENT Adult 180 mmHg 100 mmHg 260 mmHg 5 mmHg Pediatric 140 mmHg 60 mmHg 160 mmHg 5 mmHg Neonate 100 mmHg 40 mmHg 120 mmHg 5 mmHg NOTE The default patient size and initial cuff inflation pressure can be customized See section 1 3 15 User Configuration for details on how to set custom defaults Revised 06 25 99 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 2 3 Room Number and Bed Letter To monitor more than one patient assign each patient to a particular room number and bed letter Use the ROOM BED key 24 to set the room number from 0 to 99 and the bed letter as a b c or d On initial power up no stored patient data the room number and bed letter default to 0 Press the ROOM BED key 24 The ROOM LED flashes indicating that the Number and Bed Letter room number can now be changed gt PATIENT INFO Press the Patient Info Up or Down Arrow TE Ne key 27 amp 28 to increment or decrement IE Press to change BED the Room Number ROOM and Bed Letter the room number e MEMORY FULL HOLD TO
77. the measurement such as an electro surgical unit After passing through filter blocks red and infrared signals and are alternately selected by the remultiplexer for further processing Next the signal is amplified by the dc gain stage Having the ability to apply a different gain to the two components this block functions as a coarse equalization of the multiplexed signal An offset voltage determined by the DAC is then subtracted by the subtraction circuit The plethysmographic waveform consists of a small component varying along with the physiological pulse sitting on top of a larger pedestal The subtraction circuit pulls off most of this pedestal The subtraction circuit also helps to maintain the resultant signal in the amplifier linear region The residual multiplexed signal is once again processed through a microprocessor controlled ac gain block One of a few discrete gains is chosen for each of the two components such that the peak to peak size of the physiologically varying components is large enough to be digitized with sufficient resolution After passing through the ac gain stage the signal is sampled by a sample and hold and held for amplitude digitization The digitization is performed under the microprocessor control of the digital to analog converter The DAC voltage is successively altered by the microprocessor until it zones in on the signal being digitized A comparator then compares the signal and DAC voltages and send
78. to 0 1 ohm from the AC mains power inlet module s ground contact pin to any exposed metal part which may become energized when measured per UL 544 and IEC 601 1 A ground resistance of up to 0 2 ohm is allowed when measured from the U blade of the supplied AC line cord to any exposed metal part which may become energized Type of Protection Against Electric Shock Class 1 with internal electric power source Where the integrity of the external protective earth ground in the installation or it s conductors is in doubt the equipment shall be operated from it s internal electric power source Degree of Protection Against Electric Shock Monitor Type B applied part NIBP Type BF defibrillation protected applied part SpO2 Type BF defibrillation protected applied part Protection Against Hazards of Explosion Not protected ordinary Protection Against Ingress of Liquids Not protected ordinary Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications 3 3 Physical Characteristics Size maximum Main Unit Recorder Module Predictive Module Weight 19 cm W x 26 93 cm H x 20 83 cm D 7 5 W x 10 6 H x 8 2 D 5 33 cm W x 23 cm H x 11 cm D 2 1 W x 9 H x 4 25 D 5 7 cm W x 15 9 cm H x 11 8 cm D 2 25 W x 6 25 H x 4 63 D lt 4 95 kg 11 pounds depending on configuration 3 4 Environmental Characteristics Operating Temperature Accutorr Plus wi
79. used In er LU CAPTIVE CABLE 22222252 seyeads 12342945 Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 20610 00 0850 04 for units eee amp 7 18 13 14 jn Masimo SpO2 interface board 0670 00 0716 4 Sf 92000 2660 Kjquesse epeo 3 9890 00 090 53 Recorder circuit board 0670 00 0583 pareyuy Jejououueu L Unite with Trend No SpO2 0331 00 0102 Units with Trend display and Masimo Spoz 0331 0 VY 79 BD I 1 Battery shown but Hr used in all versions 2 i a SpO2 Circuit Board MS 3 E Units without dtsplay Bund c 5 m 0671 00 0163 as 35 55 if 255 iz 3 g ip ago Temp Probe receptacle i aga 0012 00 0953 WITH 9 V battery or 8 2 5 ga 8 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9 V battery 5 ih S 1 ag 5 Accutorr Plus with Masimo x i 48222 20 and without SpO other pine RIG Block Diagram x Revised 12 20 00 5 4 ill O O O Ole 2 oje O m ITTDS ty o 11819 um zys E peu orm 924 DIDI OO Predictive Thermometer Board 0670 00 0582 Revised 12 20 00 1 1 1 t 1 pe 1 1 1 i i Mal
80. 0 LED SUPPLY VOLTAGE 109 SUPPLY VOLTAGE REFERENCE 154 R17 SEQUENCER Ley Er ferneraesas OYP Gain er d DC GAIN STAGE AC GAIN STAGE SAMPLE AND HOLD v 0387 00 0593 03 Sheet 3 of 3 Revised 12 20 00 LCD Backlite Power Supply Board 0670 00 0649 Revised 12 20 00 SL T3NVd 3 OL ir eo 12 N A 330v3H Schematic Diagram LCD Backlite Power Supply Board 0387 00 0649 Sheet 1 of 1 Revised 12 20 00 Fu a Donat 122 i f9000000000U1 c 5090000000002 CPU Board top side 0670 00 0650 03 04 O3with SpO2 04 without SpO2 0080000000 o e oo om R44 cia mm am o C35 Inm 900 MES 0 0000000000 mn e 20000001 10000004 AN4 074 g thd i 0080800 08008000 HRS UR ome o e 00000000000000000000000 Bg 8 dm m 88802 5408 R69 00000000000000000000000 890350 o off
81. 0 R14 22 MTP6N60 CR3 MUR120 Bk Lo Power Xfmr co MBRD640 aZ 1 00k SMT 470pP ACbulk fp BAL 1 C 33992 2 200 C 271 1 00 ie sur 640445 3 R69 MF 1 Mono MBRD340 1 SMT R88 1 00k 1 Q9 MBT2222 R20 221 gt 07 1 802000 1 8W SMT 6 19k R17 MF 1 amp 113k R12 1 8W SMT NNN 221 1 1 C49 1 8W SMT 1 8W SMT 01 100V SMT 1 8W SMT R13 1 00k 1 R89 1 8W SMT Mono 33 2 j ME 1 V 1 BATT 822 0 1 2W RS 1 24k R90 ME SMT 124 0 25 1 1 8W SMT DCbulk C 33 Stdby Off On Ooff On Chrgoff R29 1 8W SMT 2 21k 1 1 8W SMT 12 12vCONVERTER ON ACOn gt Q BATT v ACCOM Schematic Drawing Main Power Supply Board for Lithium lon Battery 0014 00 0125 Page 1 of 2 CRE DCbulk 33991 2 100Hdr O gt 1 640456 4 MUR120 0 R81 R87 47 5k 365k 06 1 MF 1 2907 1 88 SMT SMT R76 CR21 10 7k MUR120 N ME 1 1 8W SMT Qs 292222 f SN 015 MBT2907 A MF 1 12222 1 8W SMT L3 32377 1 T5 4 75k 32403 7001
82. 0 00 0583 Item Part Number Description Reference No 33 0315 00 0202 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film 17 R19 1 4 W 2k 5 34 0315 00 0222 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R5 1 4 W 2 2k 5 35 0315 00 0223 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R4 1 4 W 22k 5 36 0315 00 0271 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R20 R21 1 4 W 270 5 37 0388 00 0583 PCB Recorder 38 THREADED INSERT M2x0 4 PEM P N KFS2 M204 6 24 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts NIBP Circuit Board Assembly 0670 00 0584 02 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 0008 10 0204 Tubing 1 16 N A 2 0008 10 0408 Tubing 1 8 N A 3 4 0103 00 0200 FTG 1 8 to 1 16 N A 5 0103 00 0331 Transition Barb Rt Angle N A 6 0103 00 0420 PNEUMATIC MANIFOLD N A 7 8 0104 00 0005 PNEUMATIC COMPONENT VALVE 12 VDC 3 WAY V1 9 0104 00 0006 MAGNETIC COMPONENT LINEAR VALVE 12 VDC N C V2 10 11 0108 00 0065 INDUCTOR Dual winding L1 12 0108 00 0078 INDUCTOR FIXED 150 uH power L2 13 14 0136 00 0201 Test Pin TP1 15 0136 82 0014 CONNECTOR PC Header straight J2 locking and polarized 14 Pin 16 0136 87 0034 CONNECTOR PC Shrouded J4 straight header w ejector 34 Pin 17 0136 92 0003 CONNECTOR PC Header straight J3 J5 locking and polarized 3 Pin 18 0136 92 0004 CONNECTOR PC Header straight J1 J6 l
83. 00 0103 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R1 1 4W 5 10K 72 0324 00 0104 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R44 1 4W 5 100K 73 0324 00 0122 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R10 1 4W 5 1 2K 74 0324 00 0330 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R32 1 4W 5 33 75 0326 00 0101 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R50 1 10W 5 100 76 0326 01 1000 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R20 R35 R43 R46 R47 R49 R52 R53 R55 R71 R73 1 10W 1 100 R75 R77 R79 R89 77 0326 01 1001 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R4 R6 R17 R25 R37 R40 R54 1 10W 1 1K 78 0326 01 1002 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R2 R7 R9 R13 R15 R18 R19 R21 R22 R27 R33 R34 1 10W 1 10K R42 R78 79 0326 01 1003 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R11 R48 R72 1 10W 1 100K 80 0326 01 1004 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R3 R90 1 10W 1 1MEG 81 0326 01 2001 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R31 R36 1 10W 1 2K 82 0326 01 2003 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 12 1 10W 1 200K 83 0326 01 2211 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 10W 1 2 21K 84 0326 01 2492 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R26 1 10W 1 24 9K 85 0326 01 2741 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R45 1 10W 1 2 74K 86 0326 01 3321 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R16 1 10W 1 3 32K 87 0326 01 3323 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R8 1 10W 196 332K Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 33 CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 04 Item Part Number Description Reference No 88 0326 01 7680 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM R51 1 10W 1 768 89 0326 01 8063 Re
84. 00 0184 51 SE Lead Acid ES T S OR 5 J2 7g 0146 00 0043 c o 5 m o 3 m 9 e 0014 00 0225 Li lon P8 T 5 J3 gt 9 go E Speaker with Cable D 0012 00 0257 05 0012 00 0943 m Electro luminescent Is J3 panel lite LCD Display S 88518 8 NIBP Board Module IEE 0670 00 0584 02 Ro 9 6 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board 0160 00 0034 99 Eo 2 shown but not used in CAPTIVE CABLE lt J4 all versions 0012 00 0988 0012 00 0944 J8 J1 J6 CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without SpO2 J3 J2 J7 0012 00 1238 Captive Cable Captive Cable Soldered to Soldered to J1 CPU Circuit board CPU Circuit board dubbed SpO2 aptive Cable soldered to the B Communication Circuit board eager vonnector interface board J5 0670 00 0675 Gas 0 1 External Communication ees 9 g 3 ae lt Bay ERA iani Circuit board TEE 2299 5 3 0670 00 0661 01 KEYPADS GRAPHIC OVERLAYS SpO2 Circuit F 5 35 2 E d used in all versions Units with Trend display and Board MP304 12 SD Circuit noard No SpO2 0351 000102 gt 0330 00 0026 XX 5 igo a Ba Bi 0670 00 0583 Units with Trend display and 067 1 00 0162 8 amp 8 go D 0330 00 0027 8 BS m se Circuit
85. 00 Ohm R77 73 Res F MF 1 8W 196 P 60 40K Ohm R49 74 Res F MF 1 8W 1 P 681 00K R17 Ohm 75 Res F MO 1 4W 5 P 22 00 Ohm R14 76 Res F MO 1 4W 5 P 47 00 Ohm R3 32 77 Res F MO 1 4W 5 P 33 Ohm R44 78 Res F MO 1 4W 5 P 4 70 Ohm R53 79 Res F MO 1 4W 5 NP 10 00 Ohm R28 80 Res F MO 1 4W 5 P 150 00 Ohm R58 81 Res F MO 1 4W 5 P 220 00 Ohm R12 82 Wire Jumper Ins 22GA 0 300 W2 83 Wire Jumper Ins 22GA 0 400 W1 84 Sleeving Heatshrink BIk 3 4 FOR M1 85 Wire Preformed Test Point FOR COM VBULK 86 Conn Hdr 1 Ctr Locking 14 Pos J3 87 Conn Hdr Amp 640445 3 J4 88 Conn PCB HDR LCK J2 PTL LDG 3C 89 Fusectip 5X20MW Brass FOR F3 90 SPRINGCLIP MOUNTING TO 220 FN3 91 Nut Assem LK Wash 4 40 STD FN4 PAT Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 5 Power Supply Sealed Lead Acid 0014 00 0184 Item Part Number Description Reference No 92 Screw 4 4OX 312 PHIL FN5 93 Screw PNHD 4 40 X 437 PHIL FN6 94 Standoff Swage 4 40 x 125 FN7 95 Washer Shoulder 4 40x 090 FN8 96 Screw FLHD 4 40x 312 100 DEG FN9 97 Washer Shoulder TO 220 FN10 98 Insulator Silpad 0 6 x 0 87 FN12 99 Insulator Silpad 0 6 x 0 87 FN12 100 Fuse 5X20 U C T 4 00A 125V F3 101 Tubing Teflon Clear
86. 0330 00 0027 04 NIBP Trend LCD NELLCOR SpO2 IEC Italian 0998 00 0444 66 0998 00 0444 L66 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 06 NIBP Trend LCD NELLCOR SpO2 IEC Swedish 0998 00 0444 67 0998 00 0444 L67 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 07 NIBP Trend LCD Nellcor SpO IEC English 0998 00 0444 65 0998 00 0444 L65 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 01 Table 6 1a Keypad and Graphic Overlay Part Numbers NELLCOR With Masimo SpO only Monitor Configuration Monitor Part Number Keypad Part Number Graphic Panel Part Number NIBP Trend LCD Masimo SpO2 USA IEC English 0998 00 0444 7 1 0998 00 0444 L71 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 01 NIBP Trend LCD Masimo SpO IEC German 0998 00 0444 72 0998 00 0444 L72 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 02 NIBP Trend LCD Masimo SpO IEC Spanish 0998 00 0444 73 0998 00 0444 L73 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 03 NIBP Trend LCD Masimo 2 IEC French 0998 00 0444 74 0998 00 01444 L74 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 04 NIBP Trend LCD Masimo SpO2 IEC Italian 0998 00 0444 76 0998 00 0444 L76 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 06 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 With Masimo SpO only Monitor Configuration Monitor Part Number Keypad Part Number Graphic Panel Part Number NI
87. 0358 02 0380 00 0358 01 Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 6 Parts Datascope Description Part Number Rubber feet small 0348 00 0191 02 Rubber feet large 0348 00 0191 01 Plastic hinge for batt door replacement only 0346 00 0043 Front bezel SpO connector screws for Datascope SpO2 0213 09 0405 Tone Processor Board 0670 00 1134 Luer Plate 0386 00 0162 Internal Tooth Lock Washer 0210 09 0025 Hex Nut 0220 00 0004 Label rear panel large label with finger caution symbol 334 00 1510 Label Agency approvals and serial number 0334 00 1362 03 Cable Interface board to Masimo board 0012 00 1338 Nylon screws Masimo board to Interface board 0212 01 0404 Front bezel SpO connector screws for Nellcor and Masimo 0211 00 0140 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 6 7 Chapter 6 Parts FRONT PANEL KEYBOARDS AND GRAPHIC PANELS SELECTION NOTE When replacing a Keyboard you must replace the Graphic Panel Select correct parts combinations based on unit configuration ie 0998 00 0444 51 Order 0331 00 0103 keyboard and 0330 00 0027 01 Graphic Panel NOTE Unit configurations that contain an L indicate that unit contains a Lithium Ion Battery Monitors with or without Datascope Sp02 Monitor Configuration Monitor Part Number Keypad Part Number Graphic Panel Part Number NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO2 USA IEC English 0998 00 0444 5 1 0998 00 0444 L5 1 033 1 00 0103 0330 00 0027 01
88. 0V 1206 C39 56 30 Cap SMT 470 0pF 1096 200V 1206 C9 40 59 31 Cap SMT 4 7nF 10 200V 1206 C54 32 Cap SMT 0 33uF 20 50V 1210 C15 22 46 33 Tstr 60V 0 6A 2907A Q6 34 Tstr FET N 600V 6 0A TO 220 Q1 35 Tstr FET 45V 0 18A BS250 Q2 36 Tstr N 40V 0 6A MBT2222A Q7 8 9 10 14 17 20 37 Tstr 60V 0 6 MBT2907A Q4 12 13 15 18 19 38 Tstr FET N 60V 20 0A D PAK Q11 39 Tstr FET P 30V 19 0A D PAK Q3 40 Tstr FET N 60V 12A SOT23 Q16 41 Tstr FET P 60V 12 0A TO 220 Q5 42 Rect UFR 1000V 1 04 MUR1100 P CR20 43 Rect Bridge 600V 2A Small CR1 44 Rect SCH 40 3 0A SMD CR5 13 17 45 Rect 2 X SCH 40V 3 0A SMD CR9 Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 6 Parts 6 39 Power Supply Lithium lon 0014 00 0225 Part Number Description Reference 0 46 Diode ZNR 1 0W 5 SMD 3 9V CR14 47 Diode ZNR SMT 5 1V 5 SOT23 CR20 48 Diode ZNR SMT 12 0V 5 SOT23 CR16 19 49 Diode ZNR 1 0W 5 SMD 18 0V CR4 50 Diode ZNR SMT 18 0V 5 SOT23 CR8 51 Rect UFR 200V 1 0 MUR120 SMT CR3 6 7 21 52 Rect Schtky SMT 30V 0 3A SOT23 CR12 15 22 23 24 53 Rect 1xSCH 45V 10A MBR1045 CR10 54 Rect 1xUFR 300V 8A BYTO8P300 CR11 55 IC VR 15V 2 0 5A 78M15 TO220 U5 56 IC VR 15V 196 0 5A 79M15 TO220 U3 57 IC Volt Detector ICL7665CPA U8 58 IC VR SHUNT TL431 2 096 SOP 8 U4 59 Opto Coup
89. 1 UART RXDI EXT RD Receive data TXDI EXT TD Transmit data CTSI EXT CTS Clear to Send RTS1 EXT_RTS Request to Send Channel 2 UART Port A RXD2 PAO SPO2 TXD SPO2 xmit TXD2 PAI SPO2 RXD SPO2 rec d PA2 NEO NIBP Neonate select PA3 PED NIBP Pediatric select PA4 SGAIN NIBP Pressure Gain PA5 BFAST NIBP Bleed fast PAG LVEN NIBP Linear Valve enable PA7 DUMP NIBP Dump valve RXD3 PA8 TEMP_TXD TEMP receive data TXD3 PA9 TEMP_RXD TEMP transmit data PA10 GAINO NIBP Pulse Gain 11 GAINI NIBP Pulse Gain PA12 Reset NIBP pulse Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Revised 12 20 00 FUNCTIONAL GROUP SIGNALS SIGNAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Channel 2 PA13 DREQ DREQ Recorder DMA UART Port A Request 14 AD_CS NIBP A D CS 15 DONE DMA done PBO ELOFF LCD Backlight off 1 2 SPCLKEN SP Clk enable PB3 ENPNEU PB4 RS232ENB PBS DSP CONT PB6 TONE PB7 PUMP ON NIBP pump on PB8 CSTAT RS232 9 Recorder print head home PB10 RUN Recorder motor PB11 EOC NIBP A D End of Conversion Address and Data Bus Dampening Dampening resistors have been ad
90. 11 Removal and replacement of the Internal Sealed Lead Acid or Li lon Battery To remove the externally accessible battery press the quick release tab on the battery access door and open door The battery is retained internally in a sliding compartment captured by a spring loaded release tab Press the tab away from the battery the battery will eject with a spring assist mechanism Reverse the process to install the replacement battery NOTE New batteries are shipped in a discharged state for safety reasons A new battery must be charged for 2 hours for Li Ion or 8 hours for Sealed Lead Acid Battery before first use The monitor may be used with AC mains power during the charge cycle but battery operation could be limited during this time 4 6 12 Removal of the AC Input Receptacle Assembly 16 1 Press the plastic locking tabs on the rear of the AC receptacle A small screwdriver may be inserted at the cut out on the left of the AC connector to release the locking tabs From the front side of the receptacle starting at the edge closest to the Interface connector press upwards while pulling the connector out Disconnect the cable end from the Power Supply circuit board Remove the locking nuts from the safety ground terminal stud remove ground conductor IMPORTANT NOTICE Never re install an AC receptacle forcibly removed The plastic locking tabs of the receptacle will be damaged and if re installed the receptacle may pul
91. 15 seconds the Accutorr Plus returns to normal operation and saves any alarm limit changes NOTE If the patient size is changed the alarm settings will change to the default settings for the new patient size Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 1 Operation Alarm Limit Table PARAMETER RANGE FACTORY UNITS OF DEFAULT INCREMENT Systolic High Adult Off 60 260 Pediatric Off 60 160 Neonate Off 50 125 Systolic Low Adult Off 55 150 Pediatric Off 55 130 Neonate Off 45 115 Diastolic High Adult Off 40 200 Pediatric Off 40 150 Neonate Off 35 100 Diastolic Low Adult Off 30 120 Pediatric Off 30 50 Neonate Off 25 50 MAP High Adult Off 90 200 Pediatric Off 90 150 Neonate Off 60 110 MAP Low Adult Off 40 100 Pediatric Off 40 70 Neonate Off 30 70 Pulse Rate High Adult Off 100 245 Pediatric Off 100 245 Neonate Off 100 245 Pulse Rate Low Adult Off 35 120 Pediatric Off 35 150 Neonate Off 75 200 SpO2 High Adult Off 61 99 Pediatric Off 61 99 Neonate Off 61 99 SpO2 Low Adult 60 95 Pediatric 60 95 Neonate 60 95 1 3 5 2 Alarm Violations An alarm condition exists if the parameter is equal to or is outside the high low limit range that has been set When an alarm limit is violated the following actions occur The LEDs for the parameter in an alarm condition flashes The parameter in an alarm condition is in r
92. 2 10 sensor cable 0020 00 0071 01 3 sensor cable plus 7 extension cable 136 Revised 021500 Service Manual apter 1 Operation 1 3 10 2 Sequence for establishing SpO2 with Nellcor Pulse Oximetry This feature applicable only if available or installed on your unit 1 Select the appropriate sensor for the patient from Page 3 28 2 Plug the sensor directly into the SpO2 connector 15 or if necessary use a Nellcor SC10 extension cable NOTE Do not place the sensor on an extremity with an invasive catheter or blood pressure cuff in place CAUTION When equipped with Nellcor SpO2 use only Nellcor oxygen transducers including Nellcor Oxisensor patient dedicated adhesive sensors Use of other oxygen transducers may cause improper oximeter performance CAUTION Tissue damage or inaccurate measurements may be caused by incorrect sensor application or use such as wrapping it too tightly applying supplemental tape failing to inspect the sensor site periodically or failing to position it appropriately Carefully read the sensor directions for use the Accutorr Plus operating instructions and all precautionary information before use CAUTION Excessive ambient light may cause inaccurate measurements Cover the sensor with opaque materials CAUTION Inaccurate readings may be caused by incorrect sensor application or use significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins i e carbohemoglobins or methem
93. 202P 2 0136 91 0003 CONNECTOR PC Header right angle J2 3 0136 91 0004 COINNECTOR PC Header right angle J1 4 0151 00 0195 Transistor IRLD014 MOS FET Q1 5 0153 00 0001 Diode IN4003 D1 6 0283 04 0104 CAP 0 1uF 10 100V Ceramic C1 C3 7 0290 01 1221 CAP 220uF 5 10 25V Alum C2 8 0315 00 0104 RES 100K 5 1 4W R1 9 0385 00 0649 PCB LCD Power 10 6 30 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 04 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 0014 00 0181 Power Supply DC DC Converter T1 1W 15V Dual Output 2 0108 00 0058 Inductor Fixed Ferrite Bead L1 L3 3 0012 00 1237 Cable Assembly Module 20 pin J5 IDC PC mount to 20 pin card edge receptacle 4 0134 17 0030 Connector PC Receptacle Dual J2 Row 100 Pitch 5 0136 85 0010 Connector PC Header Shrouded J7 Right Angle w Ejector 6 0136 85 0020 Connector PC Header Shrouded J3 Right Angle w Ejector 7 0136 85 0026 Connector PC Header Shrouded J8 Right Angle w Ejector 8 0136 85 0034 Connector PC Header Shrouded J1 Right Angle w Ejector 9 0136 91 0003 Connector PC Header Right Angle J6 Locking and Polarized 10 0150 00 0058 Readout 7 Segment LED 8 DS1 DS6 11 0150 00 0059 Readout 4 Digit LED 28 DS13 DS15 12 0150 00 0060 01 Readout DS10 DS12 GREEN SEVEN SEGMENT LED 0 56 13
94. 20GA FOR R46 59 102 PCB BARE D S MSP1510 PN1X PCB 103 MO SM X7R 50V 100NF 1206 24 33 35 36 44 48 49 50 104 Cap MO SM Z5U 50V 330NF 1210 C15 22 46 105 Cap MO SM X7R 100V 10NF 1206 C4 13 27 28 29 31 106 MO SM X7r 200 1000PF 1206 C3 8 25 26 37 38 52 107 Cap MO SM X7R 200V 2200PF 1206 C39 108 Cap MO SM X7R 200V 470PF C9 1206 109 Cap MO SM X7R 200V 4700PF 1206 C41 110 Cap MO SM X7R 500V 10NF 1210 C10 20 40 111 Tstr 40V 0 6 MBT2222A Q7 10 14 112 Tstr P 60V 0 6A MBT2907A Q4 13 15 113 Diode ZNR 0 5W 596 SMD 5 6V CR18 114 Diode ZNR 0 5W 596 SMD 13 0V CR12 19 115 Diode ZNR 0 5W 596 SMD 20 0V CR8 116 Diode Signal DL4448 CR15 20 22 23 24 26 117 Rect UFR 200V 1 0A MUR120 SMT CR3 6 7 16 17 21 118 Res F SM 1 4W 196 365 00K Ohm R30 50 62 119 Res F SM 1 4W 1 1 00K Ohm R5 13 31 34 43 69 70 71 78 120 Res F SM 1 4W 1 10 70K Ohm R10 23 63 64 76 121 Res SM 1 44W 1 1 24K Ohm R9 39 122 Res SM 1 4W 1 1 30K Ohm R40 123 Res F SM 1 4W 1 13 70K Ohm R7 124 Res SM 1 4W 196 1 50K Ohm R42 125 Res F SM 1 4W 196 17 80K Ohm R72 126 Res F SM 1 4W 1 221 00 Ohm R20 127 Res FSM 1 AW 1 2 24K Ohm R26 29 128 Res SM 1 44W1 22 10K Ohm R41 129 Res F SM 1 4W 196 44 20K Ohm R27 130 Res F SM 1 4W 1 475 00 Ohm R6 35 131 Res F SM 1 AW 196 4 75K Ohm R11 55 66 132 Res SM 1 4W 1 49 90K Ohm R24 133 Res F SM 1 AW 1 7 50K Ohm R51 134 Res F SM 1 4W 5 10 0 Ohm R54 135 Res SM 1 4W 5 47 0 Ohm R15 60 136 Res
95. 560MF C60 C14 C17 Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 6 Parts 6 41 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 0014 00 0047 POWER SUPPLY ISOLATED DC DC CONVERTER 5V T1 TO 5V 2 0014 00 0200 POWER SUPPLY DC DC CONVERTER 1W 9V T2 3 4 0108 00 0095 INDUCTOR POWER SMD 22uH L1 5 0136 00 0201 CONNECTOR TEST POINT TP1 GND TP2 5V TP3 RX TPA RST TP5 TX TP6 5AN TP8 5DIG TP9 5AN 6 0136 00 0287 07 CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE DUAL ROW J2 7 0136 85 0010 CONNECTOR HEADER SHROUDED RIGHT ANGLE J1 W EJECTOR 8 0136 91 0003 CONNECTOR HEADER RIGHT ANGLE LOCKING J3 AND POLARIZED 9 0136 91 0004 CONNECTOR HEADER RIGHT ANGLE LOCKING J4 AND POLARIZED 10 11 0153 00 0209 DIODE MBRS130L SCHOTTKY POWER RECTIFIER D1 D3 30V 12 0155 00 0775 IC 5V REGULATOR 78L05A U4 13 0155 00 0776 IC 5V REGULATOR 79L05A U5 14 0155 00 0791 01 IC QUAD 2 INPUT NAND GATE 74HCTOO U3 15 0155 00 1007 01 IC HCPL2212 OPTOCOUPLER LOGIC OUTPUT U2 16 0155 00 1007 02 IC HCPL2232 OPTOCOUPLER LOGIC OUTPUT U1 17 0155 00 1062 01 IC MAX710 3 3 5V STEP UP DOWN DC DC CON U6 VERTER 18 19 0287 00 1104 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 0 1UF C1 C3 C6 C9 C11 20 0289 00 5475 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM 20 4 7UF C7 21 0289 02 3107 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM SWITCH
96. AY GAN ne 02 06 CONTROL T 05 07 PUMP PRESSURE APRESS FILTER DIFFEREN BOARD 1 2 U2 Y TO CUFF PNEUMATIC AIR CONN MANIFOLD FILTER 4 gt per PUMP DRIVE PUMP gt Q1 AIR FILTER 45V 12V 5V 15V 15N i Y d COMPA OVER INSTRUM BLOOD 2 RATOR UB PRESSURE AMP amp 4 PRESS amp REF XDUCER GAIN ADJ XDUCER ADJ R4 PT2 3 4 u1 PT1 2 OVPRESS REF PED SELECT o D Q3 Q4 6V 5VR 18V 15V E yoy PULSE VARIABLE i EE GAIN AMP OVPREF CLAMPING 4 SER DO k 1 4 U3 1 4 05 EOC OVPXDUCER i ud Lu mes n Figure 2 4 IAL GAIN SERDI j oe PULSE coe 15V 1 2 U7 SERCLK 16 BATSENS 1 5VR ADCSe 1 4 Block Diagram CLEAR Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Figure 2 5 Recorder Module Control Logic Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 2 2 3 Recorder Module Accutorr Plus Recorder module provides the interface from the LED CPU module to the recorder This module is strictly an output device for th
97. BP Trend LCD 0998 00 0444 75 0331 00 01058 0330 00 0027 01 Masimo SpO IEC 0998 00 0444 L75 English NIBP Trend LCD 0998 00 0444 77 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 07 Masimo SpO2 IEC Swedish Table 6 1b Keypad and Graphic Overlay Part Numbers Masimo Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts 6 8 2 Recorder Module Isometric Parts List Figure Datascope No Description Part Number Chart Paper Door 0380 00 0274 Chart Cutter 0380 00 0275 Recorder Main Housing 0380 00 0273 01 Printer Assembly w printhead 0161 00 0015 Circuit Board Includes Printer 0670 00 0583 01 Plastic Shield Anti Static 0349 00 0251 Label Serial Number 0334 00 1304 Label Recorder Paper Replacement 0334 00 1435 Captive Screw for Mounting 0217 02 0003 Captive Washer for Above 0221 00 0121 N S are items not shown on drawing Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 6 Parts Isometric Drawing Predictive Temperataure Module 6 14 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts 6 8 3 Predictive Temperature Module Isometric Parts List Figure No N S N S Description Housing Circuit Board Anti Static Shield Connector Assembly with 9V battery Connector Assembly without 9V battery Spacer Probe Washer Flat Captive Screw for Mounting Capt
98. CKET LEFT LCD gt UIT COMMUNICATIONS BOARD gt 45 N N DOWNLOAD PORT 6 gt eA E Ko 2 4 MAIN POWER SUPPLY a 4 j 9 PA Aa AC CABLE 18 ASSEMBLY a gt COMPLETE REAR HOUSING IN 27 VEN 229 2 PLACES d c em a6 4 PLACES gt 49 2 PLACES zd 2 1 D GROUND BATTERY _ LUG Isometric Drawing Accutorr Plus All Models Revised 2 15 00 6 4 6 8 ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST 6 8 1 Accutorr Plus Isometric Parts List All Models Figure No Description Pressure fitting Tubing 13 front panel to NIBP module Bezel front Datascope ONLY Bezel front NELLCOR or Datascope Bezel front MASIMO Only SpO2 connector assembly Datascope SpO2 connector assembly NELLCOR SpO2 connector assembly MASIMO Keypad without graphic panels Graphic panels LCD display with backlite Interface cable download phone jack Interface cable for LCD CPU circuit board with SpO2 CPU circuit board without SpO2 Interface cable SpO2 to CPU Mounting screws for 9 pin Interface connector Speaker with cable LCD support brackets left LCD support brackets right Speaker retainer bracket Label front bezel
99. CMOS SR AM to Non volatile memory Power monitoring of VCC The MC68302 specifies to be held in reset for 100ms min upon power up The DS1239 can hold the reset line active low for 25ms min In order to hold the reset line down for 100ms min then the addition of a capacitor to the PBRST input is needed The minimum time for the PBRST input to reach 2 0V logic hi to turn on unit with a ATuF capacitor is 142ms The watchdog is monitored on U19 11 The maximum strobe period is 100ms Therefore in order for the device not to reset the system U19 11 must be strobed 100ms max The 051239 can supply 1mA through U19 2 BACK during battery mode The SRAM s will draw 200uA max during battery mode Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Real Time Clock and NV RAM RTC U28 The RTC is a bus device that will keep track of seconds minutes hours date of the month month day of the week and year with leap year compensation The module contains a 10 year lithium source and internal crystal The independent Lithium battery is a back up so that in case AC power is not on the battery voltage will keep the time up to date Also included in the device is 2K X 8 nonvolatile RAM This ram is continuous addressed above the RTC information NIBP Control U13 U14 U15 U16 U15 is used to create an over pressure latch that will monitor OVPR_DET for a hard ware over pressure situation When th
100. Di VBULK y 2 RxD3 RxDi RTS1 CSTAT 4 jue ij Qo Temperature AN INN VY A Probe Tri State Central Station PRED Transceiver Pert Ley gt igure 2 3 lt VN gt TEMP RxD RS 232 Xceivers TEMP TxD U26 OE LED CPU Block Diagram 2 2 1 1 Hardware Overview The Accutorr Plus LED CPU module controls the functions of the NIBP receives input data from the keypad temperature probes and SpO2 module transmits output data to the recorder drives the LCD display speaker and LEDs is an interface connection for central station support and has a serial I O port for PC communication 2 2 1 2 Software Overview The software performs the following functions 1 Initialize hardware and software modules microcontroller ports and communications serial interfaces software entry points and variables Perform power up diagnostics microcontroller FLASH and STATIC RAM tests Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 3 Perform NIBP functions start measurement determine inflation pressure repeat measurement perform controlled cuff deflation overpressure limit monitor DC and AC pressure and acquire pulsations enter exit text mode decide on termination point and abort measurement exhaust cuff pressure enter or exit calibrati
101. EIN TOR cs as LOCRIE 419 PINS Lu m l Tx le hod We deg ew 0 Schematic Diagram CPU Board 0387 00 0650 XX Sheet 2 of 5 Revised 12 20 00 1 OMITTED UCCz 1 OND 7 UCC UCCBACX LED DIGIT DRIVER 2 T2188 V19 Qmm LED DIGIT DRIUER 8B gnum 3 Schematic Diagram CPU Board 0387 00 0650 XX Sheet 3 of 5 Revised 12 20 00 TUCC 155 GND B C54 122160 Ti n n LCD VIEW ANGLE CONTROL Vn axs pora POSITIVE DISPLAY Schematic Diagram 125 25 125 125 CPU Board c M c 0387 00 0650 XX MOUNTING SCREHS Sheet 4 of 5 Revised 12 20 00 5 26 45 c Eon mos Sms Se CUC 143 GND 72 CUCC 14 GND 7 1 crea CUCC 143 GND T 14 GND 7 HOTU e ute t UOC 14 GND 7 PTONE l lcs Schematic Diagram CPU Board 0387 00 0650 XX Sheet 5 of 5 YEE Ei one B gt Revised 12 20 00 atata ttt S Communication Board 0670 00 0661 Revised 12 20 00 5 28 HEADER 10X2 5 nca C18 gt 825 T eses y Sav 22 ONLY D 501 224 R2 bu 28K V 03 MELE
102. EMP Illegal Mode Thermometer switch is set wrong 991 TEMP Module Failed Thermometer internal failure 995 SpO Uncalibrated SpO fails calibration check 996 5 Failure SpO failed self test Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 17 HOW TO ATTACH OPTIONAL THERMOMETER and RECORDER MODULES The Accutorr Plus can be configured with a Recorder Module and Thermometer Module To Attach the Recorder Module Looking at the rear panel of the unit the Recorder Module is attached to the right side of the Accutorr Plus 1 Insure that the Accutorr Plus is OFF 2 Insert the tab on the Recorder Module into the Recorder Module Connector 48 on the Accutorr Plus Push firmly to seat properly 3 Use the 2 screws provided to secure the Recorder Module to the Accutorr Plus To Attach the Thermometer Module Looking at the rear panel of the unit the Thermometer Module is attached to the left side of the Accutorr Plus 1 Insure that the Accutorr Plus is OFF 2 Insert the tab on the Thermometer Module into the Thermometer Module Connector 42 on the Accutorr Plus Push firmly to seat properly 3 Use the 2 screws provided to secure the Thermometer Module to the Accutorr Plus Thermometer Module Y 9 a a EX Recorder nos Predictive Modul
103. ER Belt E PRINT CONTROL CONNECTOR z 1 i TCH TOR Vo uD 35 o 246715 VP VP R2 RSSY ONL PRINT HERD DRIUER PRINT HERD CONNECTOR B WONO 555555555 peti REA Bana ane Schematic Diagram OPCI Recorder Board PELE Bin STOLE D 0387 00 0583 01 Sheet 1 of 1 zi 4l 21 eal do de We du dm cii cia Revised 12 20 00 J4 OOOOOOOOOOOOOO000 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0 5 OO000000 _ Board 0670 00 0584 02 Revised 12 20 00 5 12 MANIFOLD TO PRESSURE TRANSDUCER TO AFF CONNECTOR pcm iE 50 NEO OVER PRESSURE SET 5V amp J OVER ERESSURE COMPARATOR 09387 00 0554 03 PUMP FILTER BOARD UCC 28 GND 18 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIATOR we pit 99 a 1 7 2 TO LED CPu BD Schematic Diagram NIBP Board 0387 00 0584 02 Sheet 1 of 2 Revised 12 20 00 5 13 150 Low i aye 150 eiw E3 150 gm 3 32 eH 5e 150 D4 BA z i 25 2 1 2 wie m gt m ET n A a 5 87 Vo 52 Schematic Diagram NIBP Board 0387 00 0584 02 Sheet 2 of 2 Revised 12 20 00 5 14 TP9
104. F 50V NPO C40 C42 42 0286 00 2220 CAP 22PF 100V 5 CER 29 35 48 51 53 54 43 0286 00 2221 220PF 100V 5 CER C56 44 0286 00 2470 CAP 47 PF 100V 5 CER C55 45 0286 00 2471 CAP 470PF 100V 5 CER C57 6 28 Revised 06 01 01 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts SpO2 Board Assembly 0670 00 0593 03 Item Part Number Description Reference No 46 0287 00 1103 CAP 01 UF 50V 10 CER C28 C50 47 0287 01 1104 CAP 1UF 25V 10 CER C25 27 C52 48 0289 01 2106 CAP 10 UF 35V 20 ALUM C64 C67 C69 C70 C71 C72 49 0289 01 2226 CAP 22 UF 35V 20 ALUM C45 C47 C73 C74 C75 50 0307 11 0472 Resistor Network x4 4 7K RN1 RN2 RN3 RN4 0 063W 51 0320 00 1004 RES 1M 1 1W R22 52 0320 00 2913 RES 291K 1 1W R21 53 0320 00 5302 RES 53 1 1W R94 54 0324 01 1080 RES 10 ohm 1 1 4W R3 R10 R30 R46 55 0324 01 22R1 RES 22 1 ohm 1 1 4W R2 56 0324 01 27R4 RES 27 4 ohm 196 1 4W R1 57 0326 00 0106 RES 10M 5 1W R34 58 0326 01 1001 RES 1K 1 1W R7 R11 R12 R15 R28 R33 R44 R55 R62 R67 R69 R 72 R77 R90 R104 59 0326 01 1002 RES 10K 1 1W R6 R17 R23 R24 R38 R40 R61 R70 R71 R75 R82 R 102 R111 R112 60 0326 01 1003 RES 100K 1 1W R9 R14 R16 R27 R36 R51 R74 61 0326 01 1004 RES 1M 1 1W R45 R49 R85 R91 62 0326 01 1243 RES 124K 1 1W R42 R59 R65
105. IEW AND DELETE STORED DATA Trend Mode All models of the Accutorr Plus are capable of storing up to 100 entries of measurement data Each time a successful NIBP measurement is made the data is automatically stored in memory When a temperature measurement is made between two minutes before and two minutes after an NIBP measurement it is stored as the same entry with the NIBP measurement If a temperature measurement is made outside this time it is stored as a separate entry When either NIBP or temperature measurements are stored SpO2 information is available then the SpO data is also stored When 80 entries are stored into trend memory the MEMORY FULL Indicator 20 will flash When 100 entries are stored into trend memory the MEMORY FULL Indicator 20 will illuminate continuously Once 100 entries are stored old data can be deleted manually for any patient or when new data is available the Accutorr Plus will automatically delete the oldest data for the currently displayed patient NOTE The unit will also automatically delete data that is 24 hours old The Accutorr Plus NIBP uses the Systolic Diastolic MAP and Temp displays to view stored data The Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen use the LCD to display up to 5 measurements at a time The stored data that is viewed is for the currently selected patient indicated by the room number bed letter 1 3 6 1 To View the Stored Measurements on the Accutorr Plus NIBP 1 Pres
106. M and BED displays 25 amp 26 See table below for User Configuration Numbers The current default setting for that item displays Press the NIBP START key 38 to be able to change the default value The default setting flashes Press the Patient Info Up or Down Arrow key 27 or 28 to change the default setting 5 Press the START NIBP key 38 to enter the changed default setting 6 Repeat step 2 for additional choices The following table list the functions that can be configured in the user configuration mode User Function Configuration Number Description Factory Default la Clock Set Setting the date and time See section 1 3 13 for details on setting the clock Date Format Set the format as M D Y 1231 D M Y 3112 D M Y 3112 Reserved for future use Text Symbols Set the description of which alarm limit is being set Hi and Lo or the graphic Also change the Interval of OFF to The word Hi which will then use Hi and Lo as the indicators OFF for Interval Patient Size Set the default patient size to be Adult Pediatric and Neonate Adult Time Out LEDs and LCD Characters when unit is powered from AC mains Set how long the numeric information is displayed when no keys have been pressed in the LEDs and LCD before they are blanked to conserve energy The choices are 5 15 30 or 60 minutes NOTE The infor
107. NIBP to LCD Power Supply Shield plastic for N IBP M otor filter circuit board Inverter circuit for LCD backlite Bracket for Inverter and M otor filter Compressor for NIBP 12 VDC Cable for pump with quick connect term Insulator N IBP connector Plastic push fasteners for SpO 2 shield Plastic fasteners for asimo shield Bracket for NIBP pump SpO 2 circuit board D atascope SpO circuit board N ELLCOR 9 Interface board for N ELLCOR 9 5 02 SpO2 circuit board asi mo Interface board for asimo 5 02 Power supply batt charger sealed lead acid Power supply batt Charger Li lon Insulator tubing PVC 75 Sp0 2 board shield NELLCOR SpO2 board shield M asimo Shield metal for NIBP module Communication circuit board Screw for rear housing 4 40 x 1 25 Screw for rear housing 6 32 x 313 Battery door with plastic hinge Battery door replacement only D atascope Part Number 0221 00 0139 0214 00 0229 0380 00 0267 0215 00 0107 0380 00 0268 0380 00 0357 02 0012 00 0943 0012 00 0944 0670 00 0584 02 0012 00 0986 0012 00 0989 0349 00 0265 0670 00 0584 03 0670 00 0649 0406 00 0671 0104 00 0008 0012 00 1015 0349 00 0314 0344 00 0242 0344 00 0249 0343 00 0098 0670 00 0593 03 0671 00 0162 0670 00 0675 0671 00 0055 0670 00 0716 0014 00 0184 0014 00 0225 0008 00 0324 0349 00 0306 0337 00 0134 0337 00 0120 0670 00 0661 01 0212 12 0420 0212 12 0605 0380 00
108. NTERVAL TIMER TEMP ie e Ele CO OED 2 I A A A A IT j Figure 1 1 Front Panel Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and Datascope 5 0 gt Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Datascope Accutorr Plus 299 1 NN 3 a y imi EA START NIBP 4 SETUP M ci ci DEFLATE 4c INTERVAL lt MEMORY FULL HOLD TO LEAR 185 105 135 E3 AT Figure 1 2 Front Panel Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen Nellcor or Masimo SpO2 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 7 IE uy DIA 83 03 14 64 02 58 123 61 83 Figure 1 3 Front Panel Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen 1 6 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Aa a ON Datascope Figure 1 4 Front Panel Accutorr Plus NIBP 1 7 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation ooo NIBP Systolic Display Displays the systolic blood pressure data from NIBP measurements It is also used
109. Plus power supply or to the chassis near the battery connector Connect a DVM to the load side of F3 of the Accutorr Plus power supply and the chassis of the Accutorr Plus This method will read the actual voltage applied to the internal power supply and will be the reading used to determine the Low Battery In dicator and Low Battery Cut Off voltages Turn the monitor ON and allow to complete the self check initialization Slowly decrease the external power supply voltage in approximately 100 mv steps every 0 seconds Note the voltage where the Battery LED begins to flash Note this voltage and compare to the specification in the following table Continue to decrease the voltage until the monitor turns off This is the Low Battery cut off voltage Note this voltage and compare to the specification in the following table Type of Battery Installed Low Battery Indicator limits Low Battery Cut Off limits Sealed Lead Acid 10 95 to 11 63 VDC 9 8 to 10 7 VDC Lithium Ion 9 95 to 10 61 VDC 8 7 to 9 5 VDC 6 Turn the monitor Off re assemble and install the battery pack Revised 03 25 02 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 7 2 Set the Current Time 1 Press and hold the Timer Temp key for 3 Hour seconds The hour digit only displays Press and hold to enter the clock Press the Up or Down Arrow key to change X set mode Set hour then press again to set the minute
110. R DDAC pulses hi when CS IO is active low Timing is equivalent to that discussed in section 2 3 10 Speaker Driver This function is driven by the MC68302 in two manners One is the enable signal TONE and the other will attenuate the output signal in steps of 255 via the data bus D 0 7 TONE is a 5V signal which is divided down by 26 to 200mV and buffered by U24 LM358 This signal is then attenuated by U22 AD7528 and buffered by the other half of U24 U25 is the speaker driver section and this amplifier is set for a gain of 20 LCD The LCD drive supply voltage is specified for 10 4V minimum It can go to a maximum of 17V with respect to VDD logic supply voltage The DAC U22 will take 15 VF as reference voltage and feed that to 032 U23 to invert to 15V output That is then buffered by another section of U23 and drive base of Q9 Transistor Q8 is set up as a current limiter for Q9 It monitors the current across R32 If the voltage across R32 is greater than 0 7V ie 21 mA then shunt drive voltage to the base of Q9 to limit the current Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Power ON Tone The power on tone is used to inform the user the unit is powered on The speakers amplifier is driven by an oscillator for a min 70 mS The device is triggered by either a press of the ON STBY key turning the unit on or a reset condition The oscillator is designed to run at approximately
111. R UNIT MC68HC705C8 i id 0155 90 0336 IC 8 BIT MICROCONTROLLER UNIT MC68HC705C8 0158 29 0002 RYSTAL CMOS TTL 2 0000MHZ 1 0261 00 0188 SWITCH SPDT PC MOUNT W1 0261 27 0004 SWITCH SPST SIDE ACTIVATE DIP 0286 00 2102 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC 100V 5 1000PF 0287 00 0103 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 20 0 01UF 0287 00 1102 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 C1 C3 C6 C8 0 001UF 0287 00 1103 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 C5 C11 C16 0 01UF 0287 00 1104 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 10 9 10 12 14 18 19 21 24 2 0 1UF 5 C28 0287 00 2223 CAPACITOR SMD 0805 CERAMIC X7R 5 0 022UF Accutorr Plus Service Manual 6 21 Chapter 6 Parts Predictive Thermometer Bd Assy 0670 00 0582 Item Part Number Description Reference No 32 0289 00 3106 CAPACITOR SMD TANTALUM 20 10UF C27 33 0309 00 5901 RESISTOR METAL FILM 1 8 W 1 5 90K R5 34 0309 00 8451 RESISTOR METAL FILM 1 8 W 1 8 45K R7 R8 35 0311 05 2501 RESISTOR VARIABLE 1 2W 20 TURN HORI R1 R2 ZONTAL 500 36 0320 00 5301 RESISTOR METAL FILM 0 1 1 8W 5 3K R3 37 0320 00 7501 RESISTOR METAL FILM 0 1 1 8W 7 5K R4 38 0324 00 0100 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 4W 5 10 R28 39 0324 00 0101 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 4W 5 100 R30 R31 40 0324 00 0102 RESISTOR SMD THICK FILM 1 4W 5 1 0K
112. SCR 50V 8 0A S Gate TO 220 SCR1 43 Opto Coupler TSTR 4N35 U2 44 IC PWM Current Mode 3844 U1 45 IC PWM Current Mode 3843 U6 46 IC PWM Current Mode 3845 U9 47 Varistor 300VAC 80J M1 48 IC Batt Charger UC3906 U7 6 36 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Power Supply Sealed Lead Acid 0014 00 0184 Item Part Number Description Reference No 49 Res F CF 1 4W 5 P 27 0 Ohm R36 50 Res F CF 1 4W 5 P 4 7 Ohm R18 51 Res F CF 1 2W 5 P 220 0 OK R25 Ohm 52 Res MO 1W 5 MP 470 00 Ohm R59 53 Res F MF 1 4W 196 16 50K Ohm R37 54 Res F MF 1 4W 1 P 26 70K Ohm R57 55 Res F MF 1 4W 196 P 274 00K R57 Ohm 56 Res F MF 1 4W 196 P 226 00K R4 21 Ohm 57 Res F MF 1 4W 1 7 32K Ohm R8 58 Res 2W 5 P 120 00K Ohm R2 59 Res F MO 2W 5 NP 33 00K Ohm R16 60 Thermistor NTC 10 0 Ohm 1 7A RT1 61 Res F MO 1W 5 NP 10 00K Ohm R46 62 Res F MO 1W 5 NP 220 00 Ohm R33 63 Res V CE 1 3W H Adj 500 Ohm R80 64 Res F MO 1W 5 P 0 47 Ohm R1 22 65 Res F CF 1 8W 5 SP 47 0K Ohm R38 66 Res F CF 1 8W 5 SP 330 0 Ohm R61 67 Res F CF 1 8W 5 SP 820 0 Ohm R79 68 Res F CF 1 8W 5 SP 56 0K Ohm R81 69 Res F CF 1 8W 5 SP 100 0 Ohm R19 70 Res F MF 1 8W 1 P 365 00K Ohm R45 71 Res F MF 1 8W 196 P 1 37M Ohm R56 72 Res F MF 1 8W 196 P 475
113. SM 1 3W 5 1 0K Ohm R65 67 68 137 Fuse Micro Time Lag 4A 125V F3 6 38 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Power Supply Lithium lon 0014 00 0225 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 PCB BARE SMT D S MSP1698 PN1X PCB 2 INDUCTOR GPx80 S T1 3 CHOKE NOISE L1 3 4 XFMR CURRENT EP7 T4 5 5 XFMR EMI INDUCTOR T6 6 OUTPUT STORAGE CHOKE L2 7 XFMR DC DC MSP1698 T3 8 XFMR POWER MSP1698 T2 9 INDUCTOR MSP1698 L4 10 PRI FET BRKT W HDWR MSP1510 FN1 11 L BRKT W HDWR amp S S MSP1698 FN1 12 DK ACY 250V 220PF C5 6 13 Cap DK R X7R 1KV 125C 10000PF C10 14 Cap ALR 105C 25V 100 00 S C43 15 Cap AL R 105C 25V 47 00 S C18 21 16 AL 105C 50V 47 00 5 C2 17 Cap AL Lo Z 105C 35 390MF C16 19 42 45 18 Cap AL Lo Z 105C 35 220MF C11 12 34 19 Cap AL R 105C 400V 82MF 22X30 C7 20 Cap FI R ACX 275V 0 100MF C1 21 Cap Tant SMT 10 0uF 20V 3528 C32 35 58 22 Cap Tant SMT 1 0uF 16V 3612 C23 47 48 53 23 Cap SMT 10 0nF 10 100V 0805 C4 13 20 27 28 29 49 24 Cap SMT 0 1 10 25V 0805 C24 30 33 36 44 50 55 25 Cap 1 0nF 10 100V 0805 C8 25 38 51 52 26 Cap SMT 47 0nF 10 50V 0805 C31 27 SMT 1 0nF 5 50V 1206 C3 26 37 41 28 SMT 4 7pF 10 50V 0805 C57 29 SMT 2 2nF 10 20
114. Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 7 BATTERY TEST FOR ACCUTORR PLUS NOTE During this test the real time clock will reset Disconnect the cable from the battery and remove the AC power cord from the UUT Connect the power supply positive output to the battery cable positive terminal and the negative power supply terminal to the negative terminal of the battery cable Set the power supply voltage to 14 5 1 volts for SLA battery 12 5 1 volts for Li Ion battery Press the On Standby key to power up UUT Verify that the normal power up sequence as described in this document occurs and that the indicator for the battery symbol on the keypad is lit 7 7 1 Low Battery Indicator and Low Battery Cut Off CAUTION During this test the real time clock will be reset and any Trend information will be lost Temporary user preference settings will also be erased Power Supply requirement the power source used for testing needs to source 0 to 15 VDC and able to withstand current spikes of 3 to 4 Amperes without current or voltage sags 1 Remove the battery pack and AC mains cord Remove monitor rear cover Disconnect the Battery Connector cable from the power supply Set the external power supply voltage to 14 5 VDC current limit set to 4 Amps nect the positive of the external power supply to the input side of the F3 fuse 4 A Connect the negative side of the external power supply to the negative pin of the Accutorr
115. V battery 9 0 9122 SERE o 2 257 9 1011 Plus with Masimo without Spo Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 2 5 Notes 1 Detailed functional descriptions are found in the Theory of Operations section Accutorr Plus with Datascope SpO2 or without SpO2 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional features 3 Shaded blocks are considered black box devices Wiring Diagram Electro luminescent ove case o panel lite Si z rT ap lt LCD Display SESS MD ga Module 2238 gt 0160 00 0034 92 CAPTIVE CABLE 12 Li lon Batt Cable 0997 00 0944 10 8 V Battery Lithium lon SLA Batt Cable 0406 00 0754 0012 00 0943 eun J4 OR J4 S 9 DC Power Supply p UD wv 0014 00 0184 SLA 2 9 amp S 0014 00 0225 Li lon M J3 e 0012 00 0988 J3 NIBP Board 0670 00 0584 02 J4 0012 00 0944 0146 00 0069 OR 12 V Battery Lv60 00 2 100 suey Lead Acid 0146 00
116. VAULT COPY INTRODUCTION Chapters 1 Operation Rev AB 1 is available in Vault PM on Voyager Repair Information Schematics Parts Calibration Preventive Maintenance A complete detailed table of contents begins on page iii Also on the first page of each chapter a table of contents for that chapter is provided FOREWORD This Service Manual P N 0070 00 0429 is intended as a guide for technically qualified personnel to use during repair and calibration procedures for the Accutorr Plus part number 0998 00 0444 X X NOTE See the serial number label on the rear panel of the unit for part number identification This manual also includes information on the Recorder and Predictive Temperature Modules The information in this manual has been divided into the eight chapters listed above This publication may have been updated to reflect product design changes and or manual improvements Any such changes to this manual would be accomplished by supplying replacement pages and instructions for inserting or affixing them into the manual NOTE Unauthorized servicing may void the remainder of the warranty Check with the factory or with a local authorized Datascope representative to determine the warranty status of a particular instrument NOTE This product is year 2000 compliant Copyright Datascope Corp 1999 Printed in U S A All rights reserved Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any
117. W R36 5 2K 83 0315 00 0221 RESISTOR Carbon film 1 4 W R6 R31 R32 5 220 Ohm 84 0212 10 0608 Screw Nylon Std 85 0344 00 0223 Fastener Snap in N A 86 0220 22 0632 Nut Hex Nylon Std 87 0378 02 0004 Air Filter 25 um 1 8 barb N A 88 89 0388 00 0584 PCB NIBP N A 90 91 0406 00 0762 Bracket Sensors Mounting N A 92 0136 00 0295 06 CONNECTOR Right Angle Socket 6 Pin 93 0682 00 0072 TRANSDUCER Blood pressure PT1 sensor 94 0682 00 0086 TRANSDUCER 7 PSIG with signal PT2 conditioning Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 27 SpO2 Board Assembly 0670 00 0593 03 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 0108 00 0019 Penta filar wound U17 2 0108 00 0020 Tri filar wound U16 3 0108 00 0058 Ferrite Bead L1 L2 L3 L4 5 0136 00 0201 Test Point TP1 TP5 TP8 TP11 6 0136 85 0010 CONNECTOR PC Header J1 J3 shrouded right angle w ejector 7 0151 00 0182 XSTR 5308 SMD Q1 Q2 Q3 8 0151 00 0184 XSTR 2222A SMD Q4 9 0153 00 0168 DIODE SMD 5239B CR2 11 0153 00 0175 DIODE 914 4148 SMD CR1 5 6 9 12 14 15 16 17 12 0153 00 0176 DIODE 6263 SMD CR7 13 0155 00 0591 03 IC UPROCESSOR 63X09E U34 14 0155 00 0629 IC VOLTAGE REF 1004 U25 15 0155 00 0631 1 OP AMP 27 U4 U21 16 0155 00 0632
118. and Room Bed is printed for 15 25 122 88 99 each group of measurements BPM 5 2 e 5 64 99 P 98 9 Parameter Headings are repeated for each HH MM SYS DIA MAP line of measurements 15 20 120 88 99 BPM SPO2 S 64 99 28 9 HH MM SYS DIA M is printed with the Temp measurement 15 15 120 88 99 indicating the temperature was acquired from Predictive or the AccuTemp IR thermometer Brackets are printed around measurements that caused an alarm violation BPM SPO2 F C S 64 99 TL HH MM SYS DIA MAP When no information is available for a particular 15 10 120 88 99 parameter dashes are printed BPM SPO2 F C 5 4 99 P 98 9 HH MM SYS DIA MAP 15 05 120 88 99 S or is printed with the Pulse Rate BPM BPM SPOX F C measurement indicating the Pulse Rate was 5 64 99 P 98 9 acquired from SpO2 or NIBP Figure 1 18 Recorder Strip Sample When the Predictive thermometer is used P is printed next to the temperature measurement When the IR thermometer is used I is printed next to the temperature measurement When NIBP is used to obtain a pulse rate measurement is printed next to the pulse rate measurement When SpO2 is used to obtain a pulse rate measurement S is printed next to the pulse rate measurement If data is not available for any given parameter is printed under that parameter Parameter values t
119. and the tubing from the NIBP front panel connector 3 Slowly separate the assembly up and away from the front housing 4 6 3 Removal of the Keyboard Assembly 4 1 Place the instrument with the display side down onto a protective surface 2 Remove the Front Bezel as described above 3 Remove the screws securing the Keyboard Assembly and lift the keyboard supporting and separating the connector to the CPU board Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 6 25 99 Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 6 4 Removal of the CPU Board Assembly 8 1 Remove rear housing front bezel and keyboard assembly Reminder Battery must be disconnected Lift the Recorder and Temperature modules floating connectors off the locator pins on the main chassis Disconnect the ribbon cable connector J1 from keyboard NOTE This is easier if the NIBP assembly end is disconnected first Disconnect the Interface connector ribbon cable J 3 from the CPU board Disconnect the Speaker connector from J 6 from the CPU board Check for other attached cables Disconnect as required Remove the mounting screws from the CPU board Leave the plastic insulator attached to the chassis Use a piece of adhesive tape if required to secure the insulator to the chassis 4 6 5 Removal of the NIBP Circuit Assembly 30 1 Remove the rear housing of the monitor as indicated above Disconnect Ribbon Cable connectors J1 to Filter board J2
120. astolic Display 32 Timer Temp Key NIBP MAP Display 33 Interval Elap Time Temp Display Pulse Rate Display 34 Interval Key 5 gt Pulse Rate Indicator 35 Interval Indicator SpO Display 36 Deflate Key Liquid Crystal Display LCD 37 Patient Setup Key Menu Key 38 Start NIBP Key LCD Up Arrow Key 39 Start NIBP Indicator LCD Down Arrow Key 40 Patient Size Indicators Select Key 41 Hidden Key NO ON QN A KRW NH rn e Print Key REAR PANEL Print Indicator 42 We Thermometer Module Connector 1 13 gt Defaults Key 43 Equipotential Lug 1 13 AC Power Connector 1 13 i Datascope Nellcor or Masimo SpO2 Connector Communications Connector 1 13 Datascope Connector 1 13 Battery Indicato 47 Pole Mounting Handle and Cam 1 13 NIBP Connector 4 On Standby Key Memory Full Indicator Delete Info Key Recorder Module Connector 1 13 PREDICTIVE THERMOMETER MODULE 49 Probe Cover Holder 1 14 50 Probe Chamber 1 14 51 Probe Connector 1 14 RECORDER MODULE 52 Paper Door 1 15 53 Paper Tear Edge 1 15 Data Scan Key Data Scan Indicator Room Bed Key Bed Letter Display Room Number Display Patient Info Down Arrow Key Patient Info Up Arrow Key Set Alarms Key Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 1 2 1 Front Panel 4 c Datascope Accutorr Plus e START NIBP e PATIENT setup DEFLATE 4 I
121. ation 1 3 11 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT optional NOTE For information on the optional AccuTemp IR Thermometer Module see the Operating Instructions manual that is provided with the thermometer part number 0070 00 0346 NOTE For information on the Welch Allyn Sure Temp Thermometer see the Operating Instructions manual that is provided with the thermometer Welch Allyn P N 70873 0000D NOTE For information on the Welch Allyn Sure Temp Plus Thermometer see the Operating Instructions manual provided with the thermometer Datascope P N 0992 00 0198 NOTE The Welch Allyn thermometers do not report the measurements to the Accutorr Plus trend memory i An optional Datascope Predictive Thermometer Module PTM is available to connect to the Accutorr Plus The Predictive Thermometer provides temperature measurements in approximately 30 seconds The Predictive Thermometer module takes oral rectal or axillary temperatures For instructions on how to connect the temperature module see section 1 3 17 Patient temperature depends upon the site measured Predictive Thermometers are typically substituted for mercury thermometers to measure oral rectal and axillary sites While correlation among these various sites is generally good actual temperature differences among sites will vary by patient and physiological activity Consequently attempts to estimate the temperature of one site based on the temperature of any other site e g
122. attery or 1858 8 5 b E 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9V battery POR g Accutorr Plus with Datascope o 3 ag SpO2 and without SpO2 Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 5 2 Accutorr Plus with NELLCOR SpO2 or without SpO2 Notes 1 Detailed functional descriptions are found in the Theory of Operations section 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional features 3 Shaded blocks are considered black box devices 10 8 V Battery Lithium lon Interconnect Diagram 0146 00 0069 DC Power Supply z g 59 20014 00 0184 SLA LIS OR 5 0014 00 0225 Hon uu Er EE L38 NIBP Board 2 0670 00 0584 02 0160 00 0034 5 Be CAPTIVE CABLE CPU Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 0650 04 for units Without Recorder circuit board 0670 00 0583 id st OR 12 V Battery Lead Acid 0146 00 0043 Speaker Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board shown but not used In 0670 00 1134 all varsions Sensor Receptacle othar pins NIG Jejeujouueu NELLCORSpO2 interface board 81255 0670 00 0675 24955
123. between the Accutorr Plus and the Masimo MP 3 Pulse Oximetry Module The patient isolation requirement for the Masimo section is 1500V AC less than or equal to 1m leakage current from input connectors J1 and J4 all terminals to J2 all terminals The isolated DC DC converter supplies the regulated 5 DIG as required by the Masimo MS 3 Pulse Oximetry Module The digital 5V is then utilized to generate the analog 15V used by the MS 3 The optocouplers U1 and U2 isolate the signals used for bidirectional serial communication with the Masimo MS 3 Pulse Oximetry Module Control signal 2 COMM at J4 will allow the Accutorr Plus software to interrupt the serial transmission for future options Future interface to the Display Controller board at J3 will provide isolated 9volts to the Front End Theory of Operation An overall block diagram of the interface board is shown in Figure 1 below All data and control lines interfaced to the SpO2 Module are opto isolated Power to the SpO2 Module is isolated by a DC DC converter with the input coming directly from the CPU LED Module S DG SPOR TE DATA TCI TX 05 3 TRAREMITE DAXA B 5 3 RECEIVEB DATA SPORAN DATA TO MB 3 x RESET RESET 5 2 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Detailed Description It would be helpful to have a schematic 0387 00 07 16 while reading the following circuit de
124. board NELLCOR SpO2 0331 00 0108 2 82 a s 2j Saves aee rave vano Vera ae se Fe a re o raro V ed J3 imm see M T Units without Trend display 5G Sm gt EHE 2 Ja s7999 T SpO2 gensor ig NM 55 5 3 e S 5 ar 3 receptacle Front Panel E 5 Temp Probe receptacle S25 g 9 0012 00 1222 01 5 0012 00 0953 WITH 9V battery or 8 55 IRAQ T 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9V battery 84856 O 92520 amp 5 Accutorr Plus with NELLCOR 5 5 om SpO gt or without gt Wiring Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 2 7 Notes 1 Detailed functional descriptions are found in the Theory of Operations section 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional features 3 Shaded blocks are considered black box devices Wiring Diagram HOA cl J5 291 S10L 00 cL00 dgIN 0 78S0 00 0290 9 9860 00 2100 Accutorr Plus with Masimo SpO2 or without SpO2 Li lon Batt Cable DC Power Supply 0014 00 0184 SLA OR 0014 00 0225 Li lon
125. body e g a fingertip and a single photo detector to sense the amount of light which exits The two sets of LED s are alternately pulsed so that the circuitry can discriminate the infrared light Each time the heart pulses arterial blood into the finger the photo detector s signals return to their original level The electronic instrumentation processes only this changing portion of the photo detector s outputs Thus arterial blood not skin bone venous blood etc The determination is based upon the assumption that hemoglobin and oxyhemoglobin are the only two significant attenuators of light in the arterial blood The device exploits the difference in their optical attenuation characteristics But since the detector s signal is sensitive to the combined attenuation of both molecules the device must use two different wavelengths to discriminate their individual contributions and thus their relative concentration The SpO Module allows the Accutorr Plus Model with SpO to measure patient s blood stream saturated pulsatile oxygen level and pulse rate Datascope 5 2 Module Theory of Operation Electrical Description The SpO board consists of analog and digital sections The analog section provides all the patient finger probe excitation and analog signal processing The digital section controls the operation of the analog part of the board and provides communication to the rest of the Accutorr Plus with SpO2 via the U14 DUART Ana
126. buck converter with a secondary buck and flyback converters for the outputs The bulk output of about 17 V is regulated via opto coupler feedback The bulk supply has over voltage and over current protection The secondary battery connection is diode or ed with the bulk supply in order to provide operation without AC applied The battery is charged via a four stage charger Battery Charger for Sealed Lead Acid Battaery The battery charger provides four levels of charge stages as well as over current and over voltage protection The circuit is based on a single chip controller the Unitrode UC3906 and external programming components In this implementation the circuit detects the presence and voltage of the battery and provides a very low current source to determine the state of the battery If the battery voltage begins to rise at a preset threshold the circuit switches to a heavy charge rate until and upper charge level is attained At this stage the circuit will switch into an overcharge or float charge mode to insure a fully charged battery Power Supply for Lithium Ion battery The power supply is capable of operation between 85 and 264 vac 47 to 63 Hz sinewave input source It is a fixed frequency 62 Khz flyback converter with individual secondary buck and flyback converters for the outputs The bulk output of about 14 5 V is regulated via opto coupler feedback The bulk supply has over voltage and overload protection The outpu
127. cable to avoid entanglement andlor strangulation NOTE In the event you are unable to obtain a reading or the reading is inaccurate check the patients vital signs by alternate means and consider the following If your patient is poorly perfused try applying the sensor to another site i e A different finger or toe Check that the sensor is properly aligned In electrosurgery make sure the sensor is not too close to ESU devices or cables Check to make sure the site area is clean non greasy Clean the site and sensor if needed Nail polish and fungus should be removed 1 3 10 1 Datascope Pulse Oximetry Sensors A Introduction A wide range of Datascope sensors are available for connection to the Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 The sensors cover both short term and long term monitoring needs on patients ranging from infants to large adults The DATASENSOR is intended for short term adult monitoring The FLEXISENSOR SD available in five different sizes provides both short term and long term monitoring for large adults adult ear adults pediatrics and infants The FLEXISENSOR SD is used when the DATASENSOR is not convenient or suitable The ear sensor is intended for long term adult monitoring A range of disposable bandages are available for use with the FLEXISENSOR SDs They are available in 2styles SENSOR GUARD used for large adults adults and pediatrics and Coban with SENSOR GUARD used for infants Use of the
128. cally qualified who may prefer to isolate problems to a sub circuit or component level Component level repair activity is not always possible Isolation of defective components is frequently impossible without the functional emulation of operating software The equipment and processes required are not cost effective on a single unit basis This procedure is for the use of qualified technical personnel only Datascope Corp offers a comprehensive selection of Technical Training Seminars for this and other products Contact the Registrar Technical Support Department or your regional sales or service representative for course offerings and dates Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS There are areas where improper repair techniques will cause further damage When the instrument covers are removed observe the following precautions and guidelines 1 Power line voltages will be exposed identify hazard points and avoid direct contact Battery terminals are accessible do not short to each other or the positive terminal to ground circuits as the capacity of the battery is sufficient to create an over heating safety hazard Fuses must not be by passed or replaced by different current voltage or time delay ratings The circuit boards contain static sensitive components use proper static safeguard techniques CAUTION Li lon batteries are intended for replacement by qua
129. ctive Thermometer module Connect the Predictive Temperature Simulator Select 85 0 29 4 C and push the Push to cycle button to reset the Note the resultant display in the TIMER TEMP window on the Accutorr Plus It should 85 0 29 4 Press the Push to cycle Select the next higher temperature 98 5 37 0 Since this is a predictive device with look ahead algorithm it is important to read only the second number flashed on the display The first third or subsequent flashing readings may be outside of the limits Return to 85 0 29 4 Repeat step 6 for the remaining temperatures Record the test results All readings must be within 0 1 F C degrees of simulator settings Disconnect the Predictive Temperature Simulator and connect the normal temperature probe Insert then remove the probe from the probe holder This will reset the PTM and flash an initial value of 85 0 For 29 4 7 14 Revised 01 11 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 6 2 Water Bath Method 1 Prepare a water bath set to 89 6 to 110 0 F as a temperature reference Confirm temperature with a separate precision thermometer Snap a protective sheath onto the temperature probe and immerse into the reference water bath for 30 seconds or until the temperature display stops flashing Record the temperature shown on the temperature display Apply the c
130. curacy of the measurement If necessary clean the lens with a cotton swab dipped in alcohol Periodic cleaning is recommended To keep the lens clean when not is use store the AccuTemp with an optical film cover in place Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 6 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTION THE INSIDE OF THIS INSTRUMENT CONTAINS STATIC SENSITIVE COMPONENTS Use correct static protection safeguards NOTE The numbers in parentheses refer to the isometric drawings page 6 4 Before disassembling the unit perform the following 1 Power down the Accutorr Plus and remove the AC power cable 2 Remove all cables and hoses from the front and rear of the instrument 3 Remove temperature measuring module and recorder module if equipped 4 6 1 Removal of the Rear Housing 27 1 Place the Accutorr Plus with the display side down onto a protective surface NOTE Special care should be taken to insure that the front panel and glare screen are not scratched Remove the screws from the corners of the back housing recess and the two screws in the center channel of the rear case Slowly lift the rear housing up and place in a safe location Disconnect battery connector J4 from the Power Supply board 4 6 2 Removal of the Front Bezel 2 1 Place the front housing with the display side down onto a protective surface 2 Disconnect the SpO2 ribbon cable J3 from the CPU circuit board
131. d KEYPADS 090090913 2295 58 SEB 0 5 Battery shown but 30 Lu amp used in all versions Recorder i 0670 00 0661 01 GRAPHIC OVERLAYS d c2 ae Ss oS Sal n 5 3 2 3 5 Male Fem Header lt 32 f Units with Trend display and eT 2 circuit board Nospoziossioocios 10020 09 0020 XX i 4 T 8 9 10 13 RO d mea as l gi 5 W zo Oe al 5 lt 3 o T 0670 00 0583 i 085248 Units with Trend display and Posey OK NELLCOR 8 8 90 m 5 SpO2 0331 00 0108 X Gas CENE 2 ge e DERI SpO2 Circuit a C no z322 LEA B Units without Trend display Board MP304 3 h o e J and No SpO2 0331 00 0104 gt 0330 00 0025 5 8 2000 31 0671 00 0162 3 2 MN EEF TE gga 2 3 2 360 D 3 E m 7 Temp Probe receptacle 5020 D 2 ogg 0012 00 0953 WITH 9V battery or 855 65 2 0 282008685 Doo 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9V battery 0 gt 8oe z E gt 3 zum C 3 8 2 38 5 o ES i nm o 3 8 amp 2 2 RT Accutorr Plus with NELLCOR o 5 7146182 9 13 3 SpO and without SpO2 5 5 NELLCOR SpO2 Sensor Receptacle 4 Block Diagram 2 4 All other pins N C R
132. de the Datascope Part Number exactly as it appears in the Parts List under the column Datascope Part Number Include a description of the item EXAMPLE ORDERS 1 ea P N 0014 00 0184 Main Power Supply Board Serial No XXXX XX 2 ea P N 0212 12 0404 Screw 4 40 x 25 lg Pan Head Serial No XXXX XX NOTES Datascope Corp maintains a policy of continuous development for product improvement and reserves the right to change materials specifications and prices without notice Many components are described with sufficient detail to permit procurement through local commercial channels This applies to hardware such as screws and fasteners as well as to certain electronic components such as resistors capacitors certain integrated circuits and transistors In some cases components are selected by Datascope to meet special performance criteria above and beyond the component manufactures specifications This may apply to solid state components relays and batteries The use of other than Datascope components in these applications may result in degradation of reliability or instrument performance Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts 6 7 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations may appear in the parts listings which follow and or through the manual Term Analog to Digital Amplifier Buffer Capacitor Carbon Composition Ceramic Ceramic PWR Counter Connector RAM Contr
133. ded to all Address and Data Bus lines that provide control and interface to I O devices and the LCD on CS2 and CS3 All address lines and data bus lines used for the Flash SRAM and RTC NV Ram do not have dampenig resistors The dampening resistors are to located as close to the microcontroller U1 as possible Flash memories U3 U27 Program code is stored in two flash memories ie SST 28SF040 512K x 8 addressed as upper and lower sector addressable to 256 bytes These devices allow in circuit programmability which will allow easy upgrades to software revisions CS FLSH will chip select these memories Flash memory chip U3 is the Even byte and U27 is the odd byte Worst case for CS FLSH to data valid is 150ns max Data must be valid 15ns min before MC68302 S6 falling edge With one wait state inserted 3 5 clock periods will occur before S6 falling edge Therefore data will be ready 48 25ns before S6 falling edge which will meet the requirement of 15ns min 2 12 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation CMOS SRAM U4 U5 This memory made up of two 512K x 8 SRAMs U4 and US The memories are non volatile due to the circuitry of Micromanager U19 and the Primary Battery Backup Voltage Regulator consisting of Q7 and U17 The timing for the two SRAM s are the same The SRAM write condition will be looked at first CS RAM must be active low 90 ns min before WR rising edge CS i
134. delines for the selection of a sensor are provided in the Sensor Selection Table page 3 25 Instructions for the application of a sensor to a patient are provided in each sensor package For optimal DATASENSOR and FLEXISENSOR placement ensure that cable side is placed in the correct position See figures below Cable on Top Cable on Bottom 25000 b Figure 1 12 Datasensor or Figure 1 13 Flexisensor Placement Durasensor Placement 1 34 Revised 02500 Actor Plus Service Manual apter 1 Operation C Sensor Connection to the Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 1 Align the cable connector on the sensor assembly with the SpO2 Connector 15 on the Accutorr Plus model with SpO Push the cable connector into the SpO Connector 15 Confirm that the cable connector is securely in place The digital SpO2 values and SpO2 pulse rate will be displayed in the SpO2 and pulse Rate LED s If desired adjust the beep volume See section 3 7 Setting the Alarm Volume and Beep Volume for details on adjusting the beep volume D Sensor Inspection Before use always inspect sensors cables and connectors for damage i e cuts and abrasions Do not use the sensor cable or connector if damaged Replace with a good working sensor For long sensor life Do not drop on the floor or give other sharp shocks to the sensor s Between use store the sensors in the accessory pouch or coil the sensor cable
135. e Accutorr Plus Data is written to the module via DMA and is then routed out to the recorder Software Control There are no software requirements on this board The microcontroller for this board s functions are located on the LED CPU board Hardware Functions Recorder Driver Circuit Board This circuit takes all control instructions from the LED CPU board and provides printhead drive decoding paper drive motor control logic decoding printhead home switch position sensing and pulse width modulated oscillator for print head drive Recorder Transport and Print Assembly This mechanical assembly has no active electronic components A paper drive motor print head shuttle and print head position sensor report to the Recorder Driver circuit board OSCILLATOR gt bo gt TACH PRINT TIMING gt MOTOR DRIVER HOME SW _ CIRCUITRY M gt PRINTER CONTROLLER M HOME SWITCH 91 pes BUM gt Y RUN D WR_RECD gt PRINT CONTROL CONNECTOR RESET HOME DREQ PRINT HEAD DRIVER U2 NJ D 7 0 DOT 7 0 PRINT HEAD CONNECTOR Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 2 4 Predictive Thermometer Module Overview The Accutorr Predictive Thermometer Module is an optional accessory to the Accutorr Plus or Plus with SpO
136. e Accutorr Plus with 0 Thermometer Trend Screen and SpO Module Figure 1 21 Attaching Optional Modules Revised 02 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 18 PLACEMENT OF THE QUICK REFERENCE CARD The Quick Reference card provides abbreviated descriptions of front panel keys on one side and on the other side provides descriptions of the status codes To attach the Quick Reference card thread the NIBP hose through the two holes in the card PATIENT SETUP start Start NIBP NIB Measurement Stop NIBP Measurement Deflate Cuff Set Interval TIMER TEMP Interval Elapsed Time or Temperature Choose a Parameter use arrows to change Silence Alarm Up Increase Choose Patient Size PATIENTINFO m Down Decrease Activates Room Bed BED mode use arrows to change Display Prior Measurement s erase most recent measurement To press DATA SCAN then press and hold DELETE INFO for 1 beep ACCUTORR PLUS WITH TREND Switch Trend Menu Display Select Parameter Press to print stop print hose through the PE 2 holes in the Quick Reference Card Figure 1 22 Placement of Quick Reference Label NOTE The card shown in figure 1 22 is a sample to show how to attach the card The actual card may differ Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 19 PLACEMENT OF RECORDER PAPER
137. e accessory replace the 9 Volt battery in the temperature module and check the recorder unit for correct paper correct installation and paper jams If the problem is in the main NIBP and or SpO section rule out these simple problems first If AC power is available then the green LED adjacent to the front panel On Off keys should be illuminated If not connect the power cord to live power outlet If green LED fails to illuminate there is a probable power supply malfunction Check the battery operation LED Steady ON indicates battery operation A flashing LED indicates a near depleted battery If the green LED is NOT On then the battery or power supply charger may be suspect Confirm correct operating parameters selection i e correct patient size selection Adult Neonate Ped and NIBP cuffs to match In units with SpO verify that a sensor is connected to the unit and it is of the proper type size Verify the proper battery charge profile is selected for the installed battery 4 5 2 Isolating the Problem within the Main Unit Problems within the main NIBP and or SpO2 unit are categorized broadly into power supply problems and NIBP and or SpO detection and display For a monitor that will not even turn on proceed to Power Supply and Battery Tests otherwise skip to Diagnostics Test and beyond 1 Power Supply and Battery test The main power supply output voltages should be verified under normal instrument loads Voltages a
138. e out minutes When the battery charge is low but not below the cutoff voltage the battery LED will flash and the recorder will not operate When the LED begins to flash on Sealed lead acid units approximately 30 minutes of battery time remain for the Accutorr Plus NIBP 20 minutes for the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and 10 minutes for the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 Units with Lithium ion batteries will provide approximately 10 minutes of low battery warning time When the battery charge drops below the cutoff voltage the Accutorr Plus will automatically turn off Patient information will be retained for later use Battery run time for the Accutorr Plus NIBP is approximately 5 hours with a Sealed lead acid battery or 8 hours with a Lithium ion battery using a new fully charged battery at 25 C with a NIBP measurement taken every 5 minutes and the recorder not in use Battery run time for the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen is approximately 3 hours for a Sealed lead acid battery or 8 hours for a Lithium ion battery using a new fully charged battery at 25 C with a NIBP measurement taken every 5 minutes and the recorder not in use Battery run time for the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and Datascope 5 is approximately 1 5 hours for a Sealed lead acid battery or 3 5 hours for a Lithium ion battery using a new fully charged battery at 25 C with a NIBP measurement taken every 5 minutes continuous SpO2 measur
139. e probe 1 3 11 3 How to take Oral Rectal and Axillary Temperatures 1 ORAL TEMPERATURES Using the BLUE oral probe assembly place the probe tip firmly in the sublingual pocket next to the frenulum linguae the vertical fold of tissue in the middle of the tongue toward the back of the mouth NOTE Accurate temperatures can only be obtained in the heat pocket at this location Temperatures in other locations in the mouth may vary by two degrees F one degree C or more Hold the probe steady in this location The patient s mouth must be closed for the measurement The thermometer reading will begin to flash chen will indicate the rising temperature as the measurement proceeds The display will stop flashing and a beep tone is generated when the final temperature has been reached The final reading will be displayed for approximately 1 minute Remove the probe from the patient s mouth and discard the used probe cover by pressing on the button on the probe handle Discard the used probe cover according to standard hospital procedures After the Accutorr Plus records the patient s temperature replace the probe in the probe chamber 50 Wait at least 60 seconds before taking another temperature to allow probe to cool down RECTAL TEMPERATURES Use a RED rectal probe assembly Install a probe cover as instructed for oral temperatures and insert the probe into the patient s reccum To insure proper tissue c
140. ectable over pressure limits and an over pressure output signal interpret the transducer state Over pressure limits are set according to the patient size Five A D channels All channels are at 12 bit resolution and digitized at 300 Hz 1 DC pressure 2 AC pressure pulse 3 Hardware over pressure transducer 4 Hardware over pressure comparator reference 5 Battery voltage monitoring when the Accutorr is in battery operation Pulse Channel Filter A high pass filter is provided to isolate the pulsatile component from the DC cuff pressure This pulsatile component is digitized as the pulse channel The gain of this AC coupled channel is programmable in a manner consistent with the specified range of pulse amplitudes Means are provided to rapidly reset the filter following disturbances caused by motion or activation of the pump or valves Inflation Pump A pump capable of inflating the cuff within the specified time limit Bleed Valve A valve and control system capable of bleeding down the cuff pressure in accordance with the specifications Dump Valve A valve to rapidly discharge the residual cuff pressure at the end of the measurement cycle Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 15V 15V Y 15V 15V BLEED BFAST RATE i 4 4 Y Y 1 2 us SERVO LINEAR LINEAR pump SGAIN AMP VALVE V2 lt gt VALVE V1 de DA A 1 2 u2 N C 3 W
141. ed Recorder Module Predictive Thermometer Module SpO2 Module Accutorr Plus with SpO2 only Main Power Supply Communication Board LCD Inverter Module 0670 00 0649 Nellcor MP 304 SpO2 Circuit Board Theory of Operation Interface Nellcor Board Theory of Operation Accutorr Plus Service Manual Introduction 2 2 11 2 2 12 Masimo SET Technology Masimo Interface Board Theory of Operation SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications Safety Characteristics Physical Characteristics Environmental Characteristics Electrical Ratings Agency Compliance Electromagnetic Compatibility REPAIR INFORMATION Introduction Safety Precautions General Troubleshooting Guidelines Test Equipment Required Troubleshooting Problem Isolation 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 Isolating the Problem System Level Isolating the Problem within the Main Unit Isolating the Problem with Optional Accessory Modules 4 6 Clinical Issues Disassembly Instructions 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 6 5 4 6 6 4 6 7 4 6 8 4 6 9 4 6 10 4 6 11 4 6 12 4 6 13 4 6 14 4 6 15 4 6 16 Removal of the Rear Housing 27 Removal of the Front Bezel 2 Removal of the Keyboard Assembly 4 Removal of the CPU Board Assembly 8 Removal of the NIBP Circuit Assembly 30 Removal of the Power Supply Assembly 41 Removal of the Motor Filter and LCD High Voltage Assembly 35 Removal of the NIBP Air Pump Assembly 37 Rem
142. ed to J2 3 ELOFF This control signal is pulled low by which maintains Q1 in the off state if J2 3 is floating Since Q1 passes the inverter return current to the ground signal PGND on J2 2 Q1 must be on to enable the inverter The host can turn on Q1 and enable the T1 inverter by driving ELOFF high D1 filters switching transients on 12SW when Q1 is turned on and off ELPOWER ree FILTER DC AC INVERTER GND 12V T1 ELOFF FILTER feno GND POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR LCD CONNECTOR CONTROL FET SWI Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 2 9 Nellcor MP 304 5 2 Circuit Board Theory of Operation The MP 304 is a complete SpO2 detection and determination circuit proprietary of Nellcor Puritan Bennett The MP 304 is centralized around a Motorola MC68HC16 micro processor 0 4 driven by a 32 76 Khz Oscillator Y 2 The processor is supported by a 32K x 8 static RAM U 3 and a SpO2 program boot EPROM U 6 Patient information is initially processed in a patented ASIC U 1 Application Specific Integrated Circuit Clock pulses are provided by Y 1 a 10 MHZ oscillator The resulting analog data is then routed into separate Red and Infra Red ADC s Analog to Digital Converters U 5 and U 7 The resulting digital data is clocked into the microprocessor and is transmitted
143. ee the initial cuff inflation pressure for a neonate size patient The choices are 40 to 120 mmHg at 5 mmHg increments 100 mmHg Adaptive Inflation Choices are ON or OFF If User Configuration 3 is set to display graphics the choices are 1 or O Interval Setting Set the NIBP Interval Time The choices are OFF or Cont Continuous 1 2 5 5 10 15 20 30 60 120 and 240 minutes OFF or Adult Alarm Limits Set the default alarm limit values for an Adult size patient See Section 1 3 5 for details on setting alarm limits OFF except SpO low which is 86 Pediatric Alarm Limits Set the default alarm limit values for a Pediatric size patient See Section 1 3 5 for details on setting alarm limits OFF except SpO low which is 86 Neonate Alarm Limits See the default alarm limit values for an Neonate size patient See Section 1 3 5 for details on setting alarm limits OFF except SpO2 low which is 86 Alarm Volume Set the volume of an alarm signal The choices are 1 2 3 4 amp 5 5 is the loudest SpO Volume Set the volume of the SpO2 beep The choices are Off or 1 2 3 4 amp 5 5 is the loudest Continuous Print Choices are ON or OFF If User Configuration 3 is set to display graphics the choices are or O Reset to Factory Defaults To change all of the User Configuration items back to t
144. ek 24 hours Lithium ion 10 8 VDC nominal 3 6 Amp Hour Accutorr Plus NIBP 8 Hours Accutorr Plus NIBP with with Trend Screen 8 Hours Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 Datascope 3 5 Hours Nellcor 4 5 Hours Masimo 4 5 Hours 2 hours max in standby only 500 cycles 100 to 30 of capacity 1000 cycles 100 to 50 of capacity The real time clock maintains the time and date when the instrument is On or in the Standby mode connected to AC mains or running from internal battery for at least ten years from original assembly The real time clock will maintain time and date even if the instrument s main battery is disconnected Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications Revised 12 20 00 3 2 Safety Characteristics Risk Leakage Currents Enclosure Risk Current leakage Less than or equal to 100 A in normal operating conditions Less than or equal to 300 zA in any single fault condition Patient Source Current Less than or equal to 10 A in normal operating conditions Less than or equal to 50zA any single fault condition Patient Sink Current Less than or equal to 507A Dielectric Withstand 2500V RMS at 50 or 60 Hz for 1 minute from any patient lead or combination of patient leads to the chassis 1500V RMS at 50 or 60 Hz for 1 minute AC mains hot or neutral to the chassis Ground Resistance Ground resistance less than or equal
145. ement and the recorder not in use Battery run time for the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and Masimo or Nellcor SpO2 is approximately 2 hours for a Sealed lead acid battery or 4 5 hours for a Lithium ion battery using a new fully charged battery at 25 C with a NIBP measurement taken every 5 minutes continuous SpO2 measurement and the recorder not in use The Accutorr Plus automatically recharges the battery when required when the unit is plugged into an AC receptacle Maximum battery recharge time is 8 hours for Sealed lead acid or 2 hours for Lithium ion CAUTION To avoid loss of patient data trend do not replace the battery unless the Accutorr Plus is connected to an AC receptacle Hospital defaults and the time are unaffected by battery replacement 148 Revised 1272000 Actor Plus Service Manual apter 1 Operation 1 3 15 USER CONFIGURATION The User Configuration Mode allows the operator the opportunity to set custom default settings These custom default settings will be used each time the Accutorr Plus is turned on Once the User Configuration Mode is entered the only way to exit this mode is to turn off the Accutorr Plus using the ON STANDBY key 19 1 To enter the User Configuration Mode press and hold the DEFAULTS key 14 while turning the unit ON Release after the third beep To select a User Configuration item number press the ROOM BED key 24 to display the desired User Configuration Number in the ROO
146. ent to its original neat appearance Removal of the flux will also facilitate making electrical measurements in the affected area as the flux itself is not conductive Exchange Program Datascope offers a comprehensive circuit board and electro mechanical module exchange program The exchange circuits and modules are warranted factory pre tested and calibrated Final calibration of the exchange item is strongly suggested to match the new part to the host system See section 6 4 for details concerning the exchange program 4 4 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Equipment types other than these listed may be utilized if they equal or exceed the listed equipment performance Dynatech Nevada Non invasive Blood Pressure Simulator Cuff Link Power Supply Power Mate 3A 20V Fluke D V M Model 8050A Digital Storage Scope Tektronix 2230 100 MHZ Stop Watch Wilson LW 119 SpO2 Simulator Biotek Index Smart SAT SpO2 versions N 1290 Nellcor SpO2 Only RS232 Test Connector Pins 2 and 3 Shorted 700cc Dummy Cuff Datascope 0138 00 0001 01 Chart Paper Datascope 0683 00 0447 01 Water Bath Cole Palmer model H 12 105 10 Reference Quartz Thermometer Hewlet Packard model HP 2804A with Temp Probe HP 1811A Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 5 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM ISOLATION This section has been divided into two major areas clinical and technical Clinical problems can generally be r
147. erence No 91 Res 1 50K Ohm 1 0805 R42 96 92 Res SMT 16 50K Ohm 1 0805 R37 93 Res SMT 17 80K Ohm 1 0805 R72 86 94 Res SMT 221 00 Ohm 1 0805 R12 20 92 95 Res SMT 2 21K Ohm 1 0805 R26 29 96 Res SMT 22 10K Ohm 1 0805 R15 41 97 Res SMT 3 32M Ohm 1 0805 R56 98 Res SMT 33 20 Ohm 1 0805 R89 99 Res SMT 475 00 Ohm 1 0805 R6 33 35 61 77 100 Res 4 75K Ohm 1 0805 R11 55 66 94 101 Res SMT 47 50K Ohm 1 0805 R24 38 81 91 102 Res SMT 47 50 Ohm 196 0805 R3 60 80 103 Res SMT 54 90K Ohm 196 0805 R27 104 Res SMT 6 19K Ohm 196 0805 R8 51 105 Res SMT 150 00KOhm 0 196 1206 R49 106 Wire Jumper Ins 22GA 0 300 W1 107 Wire Jumper Ins 18GA 0 750 FOR F3 108 Sleeving Heatshrink BLK 3 4 For M1 109 Conn Hdr 1 Ctr Locking 14 Pos J3 110 Conn Hdr Amp 640445 3 J4 111 HEADER 3 POS 312 CENTERS J2 112 NUT ASSEM LK WASH 6 32 SM PAT FN11 113 Screw PnHd 4 40 X 312 Phil FN3 114 Washer Stl Narrow 0 25 OD FN4 115 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 4 FN2 116 Screw UC FLT HD 4 40 312 FN12 117 Insulator Nomex MSP1510 FN8 118 Clamp TO 220 Nylon FN5 119 Insulator Silpad 0 6 X 0 87 FN6 120 Screw FH 100 Deg 6 32 X 0 500 FN7 121 Screw FH 100 Deg 6 32 X 0 625 FN10 122 Clamp Bar GPFC110 FN9 123 SPRINGCLIP MOUNTING TO 220 FN3 124 STANDOFF SWAGE 4 40 x 250 FN4 125 Insulator Silpad 0 6 X 0 87 FN2 126 Fuse Micro Time Lag 4 00A 250V F1 2 127 Tubing Teflon Clear 20GA FOR R59 128 LABEL BARCODE MSP1698 FN13 129 CAP AL LO Z 105C 25V
148. erified in the High and Mid level pressure modes Select diagnostic test 12 Room a Bed Low Limit Press the Start NIBP key to start the test Verify that the over pressure value displayed in the MAP LEDs is 158 mmHg 1 Repeat steps 1 through 3 but select test 12 to check over pressure limit 315 mmHg 15 and test 12 b for Mid level over pressure limit 210 mmHg 10 Press the Deflate key to exit this test 7 5 15 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration NOTE This procedure should only be performed in the event that there was a failure in 7 5 12 Main Pressure Transducer Verification This is the procedure for calibrating the main pressure transducer in the event that there is a disagreement between the UUT and the external pressure gauge in the proceeding test The device is calibrated by comparison with the Cufflink simulator at 158 mmHg 1 and then by adjusting R40 on the 0670 00 0584 01 PCB 1 Connect the Cufflink simulator to the Accutorr Plus cuff connector and connect a 700 cc test chamber to the open port of the simulator Select the manometer function of the simulator 2 Select diagnostic test 11 Room d Bed 3 Press the Start NIBP Key to start HIGH calibration procedure Revised 9 20 07 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration Pump up the Cufflink simulator to 158 1mmHg Allow pressure to stabilize for 10 seconds Read the press
149. erve if the malfunction coincides with other equipment cycling especially high power motors RF generators etc Replace problem instrument with an identical substitute Place the problem instrument in a low disturbance environment If the problem persists in the low disturbance environment the instrument performance may be suspect If the substitute instrument exhibits similar poor performance in the original environment the environmental causes must be eliminated Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information 2 Use the proper equipment Special test equipment required for problem isolation and resolution is listed in section 4 4 Similar devices may be used if they equal or exceed performance standards of the equipment suggested PRECAUTION This instrument utilizes multiple layer circuit boards and laser and ultra sonic welded surface mounted components Do not attempt to un solder welded components from the circuit board the circuit board will be permanently damaged PRECAUTION Soldering and solder removal equipment must be low voltage operated and grounded to avoid static charge and stray current induced component damage Maximum wattage 25 W Clean the repair area After soldering operations clean off the repaired area with ethyl or methyl alcohol and a stiff hair brush This will remove residual solder flux making the repaired area visible for an inspection and returning the instrum
150. esive wrap or FORM A adhesive bandage for each patient Do not re sterilize OXISENSOR oxygen transducers C Performance Considerations To insure optimal performance use an appropriate sensor apply it as directed and observe all warnings and cautions If excessive ambient light is present cover the sensor site with opaque material Failure to do so may result in inaccurate measurements Light sources that can affect performance include surgical lights especially those with a xenon light source bilirubin lamps fluorescent lights infrared heating lamps and direct sunlight If poor perfusion affects instrument performance and the patient weighs more than 50 kg 110 lbs consider using the OXISENSOR R 15 adult nasal oxygen transducer Because the R 15 obtains its measurements from the nasal septal anterior ethmoid artery an artery supplied by the internal carotid this sensor may obtain measurements when peripheral perfusion is relatively poor For low peripheral perfusion consider using the NELLCOR RS 10 reflectance oxygen transducer which is applied to the forehead or temple Revised 02 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation If patient movement presents a problem Verify that the sensor is properly and securely applied Use a new sensor with fresh adhesive backing Move the sensor to a less active site Use a type of sensor that tolerates some patient motion such as the OXISENSOR D 25 D 20
151. esolved by the user Technical problems may require resolution by a qualified technical service person The error code table below indicates Technical problems with an asterisk Error codes are displayed on the front panel LED s of the Accutorr Plus CODE DESCRIPTION REASON NIBP 8810 Retry Unable to Motion artifact cycle time out weak pulsations or no pulsations Measure A triple beep tone is generated 8811 Retry Pump Insufficient cuff pressure A triple beep tone is generated Higher 8812 Stop Cuff Excessive cuff pressure detected by the software A triple beep Overpressure tone is generated 8813 Stop Unable to 4 successive measurement attempts failed A triple beep tone is Measure generated 8830 Check Probe Tissue contact may have been lost 8831 Replace Probe Defective probe or connection 8832 Battery Low The 9V battery needs replacement 8850 No Sensor No sensor connected 8851 Sensor Off Sensor not on patient Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8852 Interference Interference on signal Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8853 Pulse Search Unit cannot find signal Nellcor SpO2 Module will report Pulse Search 8853 when the sensor is not on the patient 8854 Weak Pulse Weak pulse detected Datascope and Masimo SpO only 8855 No Pulse No pulse detected Datascope SpO2 only 8856 Check Sensor Sensor problem Datascope and Ma
152. ess the Interval key When the desired interval is displayed in the Interval Elap Time Temp Display the TIMER TEMP key may be pressed to enter the interval setting or the displayed setting will be entered when 15 seconds have elapsed without pressing the Patient Info Up or Down arrow keys 27 amp 28 Interval Indicator When an interval setting is selected except for Off the Interval Indicator flashes When the interval mode is activated the Interval Indicator illuminates continuously Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 06 25 99 Chapter 1 Operation 36 Deflate Key Press this key to stop an NIBP measurement that is in progress and deflate the cuff A new measurement cycle will not be allowed for 10 seconds following the use of this key The Start NIBP LED indicator is illuminated when a new measurement can begin Press this key while in the interval mode to suspend the interval operation Patient Setup Key Press this key 1 beep tone to select the patient size Each time the key is pressed the patient size will change The choices will cycle from Adult Pediatric Neonate Adult Pediatric Neonate etc PRECAUTION It is the users responsibility when changing the room bed to assure the patient size and alarm settings set as required This key is also used to view the cuff inflation pressure for an NIBP measurement Press and hold 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds to display the current inflation pressure in
153. everse video on the LCD Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen The alarm tone is sounded unless muted with the MUTE key 30 The parameter s that was in an alarm condition will be in brackets when printed on the recorder Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 5 3 How to Mute Alarms W hen an NIBP alarm exists press the MUTE key 30 1 beep tone to silence the alarm tone for 2 minutes The alarm tone will return after the next measurement value that violates the selected limits W hen an 5 2 alarm exists press the MUTE key 30 1 beep tone to silence the alarm tone for two minutes The alarm tone will return after two minutes unless the SpO value changes and is within the alarm limits If during that two minutes the measured 5 02 value changes to a value that is within the acceptable range and then returns to a value that is outside the set alarm limit the alarm tone will return before the two minutes elapse Example within 2 minutes e 5 02 low alarm limit has been set to 90 e SpO is measured at 89 the alarm tone sounds and the SpO 2 display flashes e The MUTE key is pressed e 5002 is measured at 88 there is alarm tone but the SpO display flashes e SpO is measured at 91 no alarm tone sounds and the display stops flashing e SpO2 is measured at 89 the alarm tone sounds and the SpO 2 display flashes Press and hold the MUTE key 30 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds to permanentl
154. evised 12 20 00 10 8 V Battery Accutorr Plus with Masimo SpO2 or without SpO2 Lithium lon Interconnect Diagram F 0146000069 OR Notes 1 2 3 2 44 1 Detailed functional descriptions a DC Power Supply E ES 12 V Battery gt Mo 5 gt 8 N are found in the Theory of Operations section 5 ve 0014 00 0184 SLA 3 SN Lead Acid f n Switched gt o 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional oS o Pump Ri
155. ewers Guide Section m 7 ii for Steady State voltage Dropout Slow Sags and Surges Quasi Static Field Susceptibility 3 7 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY The Accutorr Plus has been tested and found to comply with the requirements of IEC 60601 1 2 2001 Collateral Standard Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements and Tests To ensure Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC operate the Accutorr Plus in accordance with the instructions for use To prevent the possibility of other equipment affecting the Accutorr Plus insure adequate distances are maintained between devices Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications pEr 000007 4 0 REPAIR INFORMATION CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER 4 1 Introduction 4 2 Safety Precautions 4 3 General Troubleshooting Guidelines 4 4 Test Equipment Required 4 5 Troubleshooting Problem Isolation 4 6 Disassembly Instructions 4 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter of the Service Manual provides the technical information necessary to resolve most instrument malfunctions Important prerequisites for effective troubleshooting are a thorough understanding of the instrument functions and specification as well as an understanding of the theory of operation Refer to Chapters 1 2 and 3 of this manual for detailed information Functional over views of the major circuit blocks are provided in the Theory of Operation Chapter 2 of this manual for those techni
156. ferences for various line voltages options and languages may require different components These variations are reflected where necessary on the parts lists 6 4 EXCHANGE PROGRAM Datascope offers an exchange policy for most of the printed circuit board assemblies This program may provide the most expedient method of servicing the equipment A standard charge for this service is made Contact the Datascope Service Department for details concerning this exchange program Many circuit boards make extensive use of multi layer technology and high density packaging Individual component replacement is not recommended on these boards unless the technician is properly equipped to repair multi layer circuit boards Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Circuit boards returned as parts of the exchange program that show evidence of improper repair techniques and are damaged in the process are not considered for exchange Damaged boards will be invoiced at full value and no exchange credit will be applied 6 5 REPLACEMENT PARTS PRICING INFORMATION Current parts prices and exchange charges can be determined by contacting Datascope Order Entry Department 6 6 ORDERING INFORMATION Replacement parts and assemblies are available from Datascope Corp and in Europe from Datascope B V Please follow these guidelines when ordering replacement items for the instrument Include the Model and Serial Number of the instrument Inclu
157. form without permission of Datascope Corp Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION OPERATION Introduction Controls and Indicators 1 2 1 Front Panel 1 2 2 Rear Panel 1 2 3 Predictive Thermometer Module 1 2 4 Recorder Module Operation 1 3 1 Setting Up Turning Power On 1332 Patient Setup and Room Bed Assignment 1 3 2 1 Selecting the Patient Size 1 3 2 2 Cuff Inflation Pressure 1 3 2 3 Room Number and Bed Letter 1 3 3 Manual NIBP Measurements and General NIBP Measurement Information 1 3 8 1 NIBP Pressure Limit Fail Safe 1 3 8 2 Cuff Inflation Time 1 3 8 5 Automatic Adjustment of Cuff Inflation Pressure Adaptive Inflation 1 3 4 Automatic NIBP Measurements Interval Mode 1 3 4 1 Canceling an Automatic NIBP Measurement 1 3 4 2 Changing the Interval setting 1 3 4 3 Effects of Changing the Room Number and or Bed Letter on the Interval Setting 1 3 4 4 Start and Deflate Functions 1 3 5 Alarms 1 3 5 1 Setting Alarm Limits 1 3 5 2 Alarm Violations 1 3 5 3 How to Mute Alarms 1 3 5 4 Alarms and Changing the Room Number and or Bed Letter 1 3 6 To View and Delete Stored Data Trend Mode 1 3 6 1 View the Stored Measurements on the Accutorr Plus NIBP 1 3 6 2 To View the Stored Measurements on the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and the Accutorr Plus NIBP with
158. g or digital form have been designed to pass certain frequencies while rejecting others For example a bandpass filter with a lower cut off frequency of 112 and an upper cut off frequency of 10Hz will pass all frequencies between 162 and 10Hz and reject frequencies below 162 and above 10Hz Therefore any noise that has a frequency outside the pass band is rejected and not considered i e 120Hz due to room light and 60Hz noise from electrical lines However if noise exists between the pass band of 1 hz and 10Hz it will enter the system with the desired signal and corrupt the measurement i e patient motion at 2Hz Fixed filters will always have this limitation Masimo has overcome these problems by developing a novel technique to accurately determine the noise reference patents issued and pending thus making adaptive filters work in real time even when applied to medical monitoring of widely variable and unpredictable patients With this new technique Masimo is able to solve the perennial problem of motion artifact in pulse oximetry Masimo licenses this technology to Datascope Further technical information is available from Masimo on the Internet at www Masimo com Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Figure 2 12 2 2 12 Masimo Interface Board Theory of Operation Introduction The Accutorr Plus Masimo interface board P N 0670 00 0716 provides an isolated data and power interface
159. g the N 3000 and N 25 neonatal sensors on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies in the range of 70 100 SpO2 The specified accuracy also takes into account published literature which predicts that there may be a small difference in SpO reported by the oximeter when measure ments from adult and fetal blood with 10096 fetal hemoglobin are compared Fetal hemoglobin is present in concentrations varying from 1096 to 9096 in neonatal blood and this percentage declines over time As the percentage of fetal hemoglobin in neonatal blood declines the theoretical effect on accuracy due to this source is reduced Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 3 Specifications Masimo SpO2 Range 40 100 SpO2 Display Resolution 1 5 2 Display Update Less than 4 seconds Calibration Automatic SpO2 Accuracy Saturation during No Motion Conditions Adults 70 to 100 2 digits Neonates 70 to 100 3 digits 40 to 69 SpO2 unspecified SpO2 Accuracy Saturation during Motion Conditions Adults 70 to 100 3 digits Neonates 70 to 100 4 digits Pulse Rate Range 26 to 239 BPM Pulse Rate Accuracy 3 BPM The Masimo MS 3 pulse oximeter with LNOP Adt sensors have been validated for no motion accuracy in human blood studies on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies in the range of 70 to 100 SpO against a laboratory co oximeter and ECG monitor This variation equals plus o
160. ght in the LCD is off pressing this key turns it on This key is also used to adjust the LCD contrast Press and hold the key for two beeps to enter the adjustment mode Use the Arrow keys 9 and 10 to change the contrast LCD Up Arrow Key Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen This key is used to scroll the trend data so that more recent measurements are displayed in the LCD When the back light in the LCD is off pressing this key turns it on This key is also used to adjust the LCD contrast when in the adjustment mode Use the Menu key 8 to enter the adjustment mode LCD Down Arrow Key Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen This key is used to scroll the trend data so that older measurements are displayed in the LCD When the back light in the LCD is off pressing this key turns it on This key is also used to adjust the LCD contrast when in the adjustment mode Use the Menu key 8 to enter the adjustment mode Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Select Key Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen When the menu screen is displayed in the LCD this key is used to select the menu items When the back light in the LCD is off pressing this key turns it on Print Key Press this key to print all stored information for the selected patient Press to stop a printing that is in process Press and hold this key 2 single beep tones approx 3 seconds to change the print mode between Continuous and Request When
161. h RESET and will be activated through buffer U18 7 125 These signals are bi directional at the MC68302 therefore U1 could perform a system reset Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Multiple power and ground pins are used on the microcontoller All VCC pins get a bypass capacitor to keep the local power supply quiet The following is a signal description for the MC68302 as it is being used in the Accutorr Plus FUNCTIONAL GROUP Clocks System Control SIGNALS EXTAL RESET HALT BERR BUSW DISCPU SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 0 ACTIVE Oscillator input I high Microcontroller Reset low Microcontroller Halt I O low Bus Error I O low Bus Width Select I h 16 bit Disable CPU I high Address Bus A23 Al Bi directional addr bus Data Bus D15 D0 Bi directional data bus Bus Control AS Address Strobe R W Read Write UDS LDS Upper Lower Data strobe DTACK Data Transfer Acknowledge Interrupt Control IRQ1 IRQ6 IRQ7 Dedicated interrupts edge sensitive IRQ7 PW R_OFF Power fail ure IRQ6 DONE DMA done IRQI OVPR NIBP overpressure Chip Select CSO CS3 Chip Select lines Serial Communications Port SPRXD SER DO NIBP A D data out SPTXD SER DI NIBP A D data in SPCLK SPCLK NIBP A D clock Channel
162. hat violated alarm limits are indicated by the brackets F Revised 02 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 13 HOW TO SET THE CLOCK Date and Time The clock can be set during normal operation or in the User Configuration See section 1 3 15 for details on entering the User Configuration The Timer Temp key 32 Interval Elap Time Temp Display 33 and the Up and Down arrow keys 27 amp 28 are used to set the time and date PRECAUTION Changing any part of the time or date will cause all stored patient information trend data to be permanently erased Viewing the time or date does NOT cause data to be erased Press and hold the Timer Temp key 32 ar 2 beep tones approx 6 seconds The hour digit only displays Press the Patient Info Up or Down Arrow Press and hold to enter the clock key 27 or 28 to change the number set mode Set hour then press again to NOTE The Accutorr Plus always displays set the minute time in a 24 hour format Press to Change Press the Timer Temp key 32 to activate the minute display Figure 1 19 Setting the Hour Press the Patient Info Up or Down Arrow Minute Display key 27 or 28 to change the number TIMER TEMP Continue pressing the Timer Temp key GD and the Arrow keys to set the month day nem d date h and year in that order been et pres to exit the clock set
163. he Factory Defaults while in User Config 12 press and hold the START NIBP key for 3 seconds Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 1 3 16 STATUS AND ERROR CODES The Accutorr Plus uses the various displays on the front panel to display the operational status Status and error codes listed below can generally be resolved by the user however some error codes which are marked with an asterisk may require resolution by a qualified technical service person These codes with their descriptions are listed on the back of the Quick Reference card NOTE Status codes 8810 through 8858 can be cleared from the Room and Bed displays by pressing the Room Bed key 24 Status and Error Code Table TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION REASON NIBP 8810 Retry Unable to Motion artifact cycle time out weak pulsations or no pulsa Measure tions A triple beep tone is generated 8811 Retry Pump Insufficient cuff pressure A triple beep tone is generated Higher 8812 Stop Cuff Excessive cuff pressure detected by the software A triple beep Overpressure tone is generated 8813 Stop Unable to 4 successive measurement attempts failed A triple beep tone is Measure generated 8830 Check Probe Tissue contact may have been lost 8831 Replace Probe Defective probe or connection 8832 Battery Low The 9V battery needs replacement 8850 No Sensor No sensor co
164. he assembly out towards the bottom of the unit and disconnect the ribbon connectors at J6 and J5 4 6 8 Removal of the NIBP Air Pump Assembly 37 1 Remove the Motor Filter and LCD High Voltage assembly 2 Remove motor connector J5 from the Motor Filter board Disconnect plastic tubing from center port of air pump Remove remaining motor bracket retaining screw the other screw was removed as part of the Motor Filter board removal and slide air pump out of the retaining bracket 4 6 9 Removal of the LCD Display Assembly and Back Light 5 1 Disconnect LCD Back Light cable connector J1 at the LCD high voltage module Disconnect the LCD ribbon cable at the right of the display Remove the two screws of the LCD mounting bracket on the left side only Slide bracket out and disengage the LCD display from the right side bracket Remove the two screws attaching the back light 4 6 10 Removal of the SpO Circuit Board 40 The 2 circuit board is located in a cavity between the Power Supply board and the CPU board 1 Disconnect the short ribbon cable from the CPU board J7 to the SpO circuit board Check and insure that the SpO2 cable to the front panel connector has been disconnected during the front bezel removal Remove the four screws on the top end of the circuit board and pull the assembly out of the chassis Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 6
165. he internal battery charges automatically when AC power is applied WARNING When attached to other products ensure that the total chassis leakage currents of all units combined do not exceed 100UA Press the ON STANDBY key 19 to activate the unit If it is required to enter the User Configuration mode press and hold the DEFAULTS key 14 while the unit is powering on See section 1 3 15 for more details on the User Configuration mode The unit begins a countdown from 20 and performs internal diagnostic tests Any status codes are displayed in the appropriate LED See section 1 3 16 for a list of status codes At the end of power up all of the displays including the LCD on the Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen illuminate and then blank except the Bed Letter and Room Number displays 25 amp 26 which does not blank A beep tone will sound during the power up sequence to confirm the operation of the audio indicator If the time and date need to be set see section 1 3 13 for instructions On Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen adjust the contrast on the LCD if necessary To adjust the contrast press and hold the MENU key 8 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds Use the LCD UP amp LCD Down ARROW keys 9 amp 10 to adjust the contrast See section 1 3 8 Setting the LCD Contrast for more details Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 12 20 00 1 3 2 PATIENT SETUP AND ROOM BED ASSIGNMENT 1 3
166. id compression or restriction of the pressure hose NOTE The NIBP cuff should not be placed on a limb that is being utilized for any other medical procedure For example an I V catheter If required select the patient size with the PATIENT SETUP key 37 On initial power up the configurable default setting is used Otherwise the last selected patient size is used Initial default cuff inflation pressures depend on the Patient Size setting See section 1 3 2 2 for details on changing the initial cuff inflation pressure Press the START NIBP key 38 to begin an NIBP measurement A beep is sounded after a completed measurement NOTE Inflate the cuff only after proper application to the patient s limb Cuff damage can result if the cuff is left unwrapped and then inflated The cuff begins to inflate to the selected cuff pressure After reaching the selected pressure the cuff begins to slowly deflate and the Accutorr Plus collects oscillometric pulsations If the initial cuff inflation is found to be inadequate the unit retries with a higher inflation pressure 50 mmHg in the adult mode 50 in the pediatric mode 40 mmHg in the neonate mode A triple beep tone is generated NOTE Any time there is an unsuccessful NIBP measurement a triple beep tone is generated and the Diastolic Systolic NIBP HR MAP and Timer Temp LED s will be replaced with dashes Have the patient remain still to avoid unnecessary motion artifact After
167. ill sound for the violation Press the Mute Key to silence the alarms After the fifth measurement is complete allow the cuff to pump up Press Deflate key Verify cuff deflates Review the data that was stored in the database by scrolling through the patient trend information Use the Up and Down Room and Bed keys or LCD display of the UUT and verify that the Systolic and Diastolic information is available in the LED s for each stored settings Remove the cuff from the UUT and press the Start key Confirm that the UUT pump runs and that it displays a 10 in the Systolic LED within 60 seconds and attempts another inflation Press the Deflate key to stop test Revised 03 25 02 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 9 TREND MEMORY INITIALIZATION 1 To clear the UUT Trend Memory for all patient settings press and hold the Delete Info key while powering up the unit 7 10 SpO2 NORMAL OPERATION Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 NOTE This procedure be accomplished with the Biotek Index SpO simulator or an equivalent SpO simulator The purpose of this test is to verify that an SpO2 signal is recognized alarm limits are captured and the data is trended A full operational test may be conducted if so warranted within the limits of the published specification See chapter 3 of this manual for specifications 1 Set the simulator to an SpO saturation level of 98 pulse rate of 60 bpm and
168. in the Continuous mode the PRINT Indicator LED is illuminated When loading in a new roll of recorder paper press this key to feed the paper through the printer Print Indicator This indicator is illuminated when continuous printing of measurements is selected Defaults Key Press and hold this key 2 single beep tones approx 3 seconds to reset all parameters back to the hospital default settings This includes alarms inflation pressure interval etc When in the process of making a change to a setting you can return to the original setting by momentarily pressing this key To enter the User Configuration press and hold this key 1 beep tone while turning the unit on See section 1 3 15 for details on default settings and User Configuration SpO2 Connector Accutorr Plus model with Datascope Nellcor or Masimo 5 gt This connector is used to attach Datascope Nellcor or Masimo 5 2 sensors AC Power Indicator This green LED illuminates whenever AC power is applied to the unit Battery Indicator This green LED illuminates whenever the unit is operating on battery power The LED will flash when the battery requires charging When the LED begins flashing approximately 30 minutes of battery time remain on the Accutorr Plus NIBP 20 minutes on the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and 10 minutes on the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO NIBP Connector This connector is used to attach
169. iodes display a series of scrolling LED tests After the initial power up sequence an a is displayed in the bed LED a 0 is displayed in the Room LED s and ddd is displayed in the Systolic LED s Press the On Standby key to turn the UUT off 7 5 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS The Service Diagnostics tests must be run in the sequence indicated Not following the tests in the order shown may result in the test failing The numbers and letters in parentheses after the title of each test represent the room number and bed letter used to access the test 7 5 1 Introduction Hidden Key To enter the Service Diagnostics mode while powering on the unit press and hold the hidden key until two beeps are heard The hidden key is the Adult symbol above the Patient Setup key Verify that after the initial power up sequence a 0 is displayed in the Room LED a is displayed in the Bed LED and ddd is displayed in the Systolic LED s Revised 10 29 99 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 5 2 Software Version Test 0a Ob This test displays the installed software version s in the monitor The results are displayed in the read outs illustrated in figure 7 1 Confirm that the ROOM number is at 0 otherwise use the ROOM BED key to select the ROOM and the Up Down keys to set Room number to 0 Press ROOM BED key to select BED Use the Up Down arrow keys to select test a or b Monitors wi
170. ion pressure 5 Press the INTERVAL key 34 The current seection is displayed in the Interval Elap Time T emp display 33 Pressthe INTERVAL key to scroll to the next available interval selection T he selections are Off when set to graphic display CONT conti nuous 1 2 5 5 10 15 20 30 60 120 and 240 minutes W hen an interval setting is selected except for Off the Interval Indicator 35 flashes W hen the interval mode is activated the Interval Indicator illuminates continuously 6 Thedisplayed interval time is entered when the INTERVAL key has not been pressed for 15 seconds or when theTIM ER TEM P key 32 is pressed which changes the display back to Elap Time or when the START NIBP key 38 is pressed which initiates an N IBP measure ment activates the Interval M ode and changes the display back to Elap Time 7 If theSTART NIBP key 38 has not already been pressed press to take a measurement and to activate the interval mode OTE If the interval timeis changed the START NIBP key does not need to be pressed for the new interval to initiate W hen the new time interval has dapsed a measurement will be taken NOTE W hen theN IBP continuous interval is chosen the A ccutorr Plus will take back to back one right after the other blood pressure readings As a safety precaution a five minute limit is placed on continuous measurements After 5 minutes the NIBP interval will automatically switch to measu
171. is circuit is tripped the pneumatic drivers will be disengaged and no NIBP functions will exist until a power on reset occurs The over pressure signal may have inadvertent triggers In order for OVPR_DET to trigger the latch it must be active low for 66ms min due to C11 R16 and R15 U15 also is used for a pneumatic safety latch In the case of a MC68302 clock failure the pneumatic drivers will be disengaged upon a power on reset If the clock is running then the software will toggle EN PNEUN to enable the drivers and NIBP functions will work Upon power on reset the following sequence must be met in order for the over pressure and pneumatic safety latches to be initialized properly U15 1 must go to a logic hi 76ns min before rises to a logic hi and RST must go to a logic hi 76ns min before EN PNEU toggles logic low to a logic hi The pneumatic drivers are made up of U14 U13 and U16 These gates are used for the turn on of the pump dump valve linear valve and other controls As discussed above they will only work given the proper initialization or no fault condition The serial clock to the NIBP A D TLC2543 is controlled via U13 SPCLK comes from the SCP of the MC68302 and is gated SPCLKEN to form SER SPCLK cannot be higher than 4 1 MHz AD CS is the enable to the chip select input of the device EOC is an output signal of the A D and specifies an end of conversion It goes hi to low and remains lo
172. ive Washer for Above Not shown Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Datascope Part Number 0380 00 0271 0670 00 0582 0349 00 0251 0012 00 0953 0012 00 1335 0432 00 0008 0221 00 0140 0217 02 0003 0221 00 0121 Revised 12 20 00 M th IS DASS e Isometric Drawing Mobile Stand Type 1 Gray Base Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 6 Parts 6 8 4 Mobile Stand Type 1 Gray Base Assembly Parts List Figure No Description Basket Pole Assembly Base Caster Caster Locking Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Datascope Part Number 0436 00 0100 0436 00 0099 0436 00 0098 0401 00 0023 01 0401 00 0023 02 Revised 12 20 00 6 18 Revised 12 20 00 Isometric Drawing Mobile Stand Type 2 Black Base Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 6 Parts 6 8 5 Mobile Stand Type 2 Black Base Assembly Parts List Figure No Description 1 Basket 2 Pole 3 Polyurethane Sheel 4 Base Casting Not Shown Replacement ardwarekK it 6 8 6 Mounting Options Sample 9 Wall Mount 5 5 aX 5 QI CX 9 I Any Model of the Accutorr Plus Accutorr Plus Mounting Adaptor 0406 00 0728
173. l be an active low signal used to enable a download to this future board Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Figure 2 13 Tone Processor Module Functional Block Diagram Front End Connections The front end section of the future Display Controller board will be provided with an unregulated 9V and 9V These supplies will be able to sustain maximum loads of 56mA each refer to the manufacturers data sheet for T2 CDI 109D5VFS 2 2 13 Tone Processor Board Theory of Operation The Accutorr Plus Tone Processor module drives all alarms and advisory tones generated by the LED CPU module to the speaker The signal is passed through a DAC Digital to Analog Converter which controls the rise and decay of the output tone to comply with EN 475 specification Device U1 is Atmel ATmegal03 8 bit AVR microcontroller The ATmegal03 isa low power CMOS microcontroller based on the AVR RISC architecture Its throughput approaches one MIPS per MHz allowing optimization of power consumption versus processing speed U2 is a dual 8 bit DAC that interfaces to the Microcontroller It controls the tone up down ramping under the command of the Microcontroller by controlling the attenuation to its input signal The device s chip select and write enable pulses are provided by the Microcontroller Proper hardware operation places specific requirements on the module
174. l out in normal use 4 6 13 Thermal Printer optional module Detach the complete module from the main NIBP section by removing the two screws in the plastic housing Grasp the plastic housing and pull to the rear to disengage the Interface connector Remove the two screws retaining the circuit board and the anti static shield assembly Remove the shield Remove the remaining two screws and lift the circuit board out 4 12 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 6 14 Thermometer Predictive optional module 1 Detach the complete module from the main NIBP section by removing the two screws in the plastic housing Grasp the plastic housing and pull to the rear to disen gage the interface connector Disconnect the 9 V battery NOTE Newer modules do not contain a battery Skip this step Remove J2 and J3 connectors from the circuit board to front panel input receptacle NOTE The connectors may be reversed or interchanged without affecting final function Remove the three screws securing the circuit board and anti static shield Remove the assembly 4 6 15 AccuTemp IR Infrared Thermometer optional module The AccuTemp has no user accessible adjustments or replaceable parts except for the 9 Volt battery If problems arise contact Datascope Technical Service 4 6 16 AccuTemp IR Mounting Cradle The mounting cradle has no adjustments or replaceable parts The mounting
175. lder After 128 power cycles the AccuTemp must be put back into the holder to be reset When the 129th power cycle is reached and the Start button is pressed 4 L s are displayed indicating that the AccuTemp is locked and must be returned to its holder NOTE The AccuTemp thermometer should be at room temperature when it is used If it has been in a very warm or very cold environment it may need time for the thermometer temperature to equalize to ambient temperature 4 5 4 3 Troubleshooting The following table provides suggestions to resolve problems when taking temperature measurements Symptom Suggestion Various readings when taking measurements in the same location ear or axilla Quick repetitive measurements in the same location can result in a decrease in temperature This can occur because the optical head of AccuTemp may slightly cool the area Wait a few minutes for the temperature of the area to equilibrate Replace cover and clean lens See section 3 3 Maintenance for details on lens cleaning Various readings when taking measurements iN Opposite ears The patient may by lying down on one ear The measurement of the ear that was down may be a higher temperature Wait a few minutes for the temperature of the ear canal to equilibrate This is also a factor if the area has been covered for any reason i e hat blanket bandage telephone etc No measurement or inaccurate measurements
176. ler TSTR 4N35 U2 60 Varistor 300VAC 80 M1 61 IC PWM 3844 SO 8 U1 62 IC PWM 3843 SO 8 U6 9 63 IC Batt Charger BQ2000 SOIC U7 64 Res CF 1 4W 5 4 7 Ohm R18 65 Res F MF 1 4W 1 P 226 00K Ohm R4 21 66 Res 2W 5 0 10 Ohm R22 67 Res F MO 2W 5 P 120 00K Ohm R2 68 Res MO 2W 5 NP 33 00K Ohm R16 69 Thermistor NTC 10 0 Ohm 1 7A RT1 70 Res F MO 1W 5 NP 470 00 Ohm R46 59 71 Res FMO1W 5 0 47 Ohm 1 72 Res 1 4W 5 22 00 Ohm 14 73 Res CF 1 4W 5 47 0 Ohm 28 74 Res SMT 1 00KOhm 1 1206 R69 70 71 75 75 Res SMT 150 00KOhm 1 1206 R57 76 Res SMT 200 00KOhm 1 1206 R25 74 77 Res SMT 221 00 Ohm 1 1206 R32 83 78 Res SMT 27 40 Ohm 1 1206 R36 54 79 Res SMT 365 00KOhm 1 1206 R30 50 62 87 80 Res SMT 681 00KOhm 1 1206 R48 79 81 Res F SM 1 2W 5 1 0K Ohm R65 67 68 82 Res F SM 1 4W 5 47 0 Ohm R84 83 Res SMT 4 7 Ohm 596 1206 R53 84 Res F SM 1 4W 25 1 24K Ohm 9 19 39 40 52 85 Res SMT 1 00K Ohm 1 0805 R5 13 31 34 43 78 82 85 88 86 Res SMT 1 00K Ohm 196 0805 R95 87 Res SMT 10 70K Ohm 1 0805 R10 23 45 58 63 76 93 88 Res SMT 113 00K Ohm 196 0805 R17 47 89 Res SMT 124 00 Ohm 1 0805 R90 90 Res SMT 13 70K Ohm 1 0805 R7 6 40 Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 6 Parts Power Supply Lithium lon 0014 00 0225 Item Part Number Description Ref
177. lified service personnel only CAUTION Li lon batteries used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistreated Do not disassemble heat above 100 C 212 F or incinerate Replace battery with Datascope P N 0146 00 0069 only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion CAUTION Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire 4 3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES This procedure does not cover all possible problems The intent of troubleshooting is to provide quick isolation and remedy of malfunctions and to return the instrument promptly to safe patient care A logical approach will quickly identify the problem and suggest cost effective solutions Troubleshooting Tips 1 Isolate the cause of the problem to be either clinical instrument or external If a clinical cause is suspected take the physiological measurement by a manual method or use an alternate measuring device Check the physiological value against the instrument specifications if exceeds specification continue with manual or alternate method If a problem with the instrument is suspected first examine and or replace patient connected accessories Check instrument set up configuration Ensure the correct battery charge profile is selected for the installed battery If all set ups are OK replace instrument with similar device If che environment is suspected obs
178. list of error and status codes 1 3 3 3 Automatic Adjustment of Cuff Inflation Pressure Adaptive Inflation Theunit adjusts the inflation pressure according to the previous reading of the systolic pressure After the first successful measurement the inflation pressure is the previous systolic 50 mmH g in the adult mode and 50 mmH g in the pediatric mode and 40 mmH in the neonate mode W hen not in interval mode the adaptive inflation may be disabled To view the current inflation pressure press and hold 2 beep tones approximately 3 seconds the Patient Setup K ey 37 The current inflation pressureis shown in theMAP display If required usethe Patient Info Up amp Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to change the inflation pressure It is also possibleto permanently overridethis adjustment in the U ser Configuration See section 1 3 15 for details Revised 05 22 02 Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 4 AUTOMATIC NIBP MEASUREMENTS Interval M ode Accutorr Plus be set to automatically take NIBP measurements On initial power up the interval setting will default to OFF The User Configuration mode can be used to set custom defaults for the Interval M ode See section 1 3 15 U ser Configuration for details In this mode the adaptive inflation is always enabled Follow Steps 1 4 the Manual Procedure Section 1 3 3 to select attach and apply the cuff and to adjust theinitial cuff inflat
179. llivolts Table 7 9 describes the tests performed Test Description Acceptable Test Room Number Sub Test Patient Limit mV Bed Letter Gain 1 Low Test 25 10 Gain 2 Med Test 50 10 Gain 3 High Test 75 10 Table 7 9 Revised 9 20 07 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 5 12 Main Pressure Transducer Verification Test 11a 11b 11 This tests the calibration of the main pressure transducer in LOW MED and HIGH modes This is done by comparing the readings of the UUT to an external pressure gauge in LOW mode below 100 mmHg in MED mode between 100 mmHg to 200 mmHg and in HIGH mode between 200 mmHg to 300 mmHg In the event of a disagreement between the device and an external gauge the transducer must be calibrated by performing the calibration in section 7 5 15 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration 1 Select diagnostic test 11 Room a Bed Press the Start NIBP key to start LOW calibration test Verify that the pump comes on the pressure increases and then the pump stops After 10 seconds verify that the pressure settles below 100 mmHg Compare the final pressure displayed to an accu rate 0 2 external pressure gauge The MAP LEDs reading should agree within 1 with the external pressure gauge If it does not agree a failure has occurred and proceed to 7 5 15 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration Press the Deflate key to release the p
180. log Section The operation of the analog section is controlled by the digital part of the board by Supplying CLKSEQ clock signal to the sequencer Latching signals DO 7 into control register with strobe signals CONTROL REGO CONTROL REG1 and CONTROL REG2 Monitoring COMP and SAT signals The sequencer controls the front end of analog section It provides RD DRV and IR DRV signals for the LED drive circuit which in turn alternately drive red and infrared LED emitters in the probe A single photo detector on the opposite side of the finger produces current pulses proportional to the amount of light received The sequencer also sets the gain of the current to voltage pre amp and controls the demultiplexer Gain values for current to voltage pre amp are derived from control register signals IR IRI RDO and RDI The fact that the sequencer has synchronous control of LED drive gain of current to voltage pre amp and demultiplexer makes it possible to set different current to voltage gain values for infrared and red signals The control registers provide data for the DAC and set gain values of dc gain DCGO DCG L1 ac gain ACGO ACG1 and current to voltage pre amp IRO IR1 RDO RD1 i Accutorr Plus Service Manual R d 12 20 00 NES Chapter 2 Theory of Operation stages Wide gain range gives the board enough flexibility to acquire signals from fingers spanning a wide range of thicknesses or alternatively from other sites
181. logic control section consisting of U1 U2 and U3 provide the buffer and isolation functions from the main CPU circuit to the Nellcor oximeter section RX to Nellcor SPO2_RX from CPU SPO2 COMM 5V RESET to Nellcor SPO2RSTYfrom CPU Ld TX from Nellcor SPO2 COMM Figur2 11 Datascope Interface Circuit to Nellcor Datascope Interface Circuit to NELLCOR MP 304 Oximeter MP304 Oximeter 0670 00 0675 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 2 11 Masimo SET Technology Masimo SET Technology combines advances in fundamental sensor technology digital signal processing an easily portable platform and a low noise hardware platform incorporating multiple wavelengths applicable to many physiological parameters Masimo s SET Technology is composed of three components 1 new signal processing apparatus 2 a new method for nvivo measurement and 3 new sensor technologies The main benefit of Masimo s technology is the effective cancellation of unpredictable in band noise noise which is in the same frequency phase and or amplitude space as the desired signal Conventional fixed filters whether analo
182. lse Rate will be displayed on the SpO2 and Pulse Rate LED s 4 If desired adjust the beep volume See Section 3 7 Setting the Alarm Volume and Beep Volume for details on adjusting the beep volume 1 3 10 3 1 MASIMO Sensors and Patient Cable MASIMO provides a family of sensors suitable for a wide variety of clinical settings and patients Specific sensors have been developed for neonates infants children and adults All sensors are indicated for continuous non invasive monitoring of arterial oxygen saturation SpO2 and pulse rate The LNOP DCI Adult Re usable Finger Sensor can also be used for spot check applications if needed All sensors are intended for single patient use only except for the LNOP eDCI Adult Re usable Finger Sensor A Selecting a Sensor Sensors are designed for specific sites on patients with designated weight ranges To select the appropriate sensor consider the patient s weight level of activity adequacy of perfusion which sensor sites are available and the anticipated duration of monitoring B Cleaning and Re use The sensor may be reattached to the same patient if the emitter and detector windows are clear and the adhesive still adheres to the skin The adhesive can be partially rejuvenated by wiping with an alcohol wipe and allowing the sensor to thoroughly air dry prior to replacement on the patient Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 06 19 01 Chapter 1 Operation
183. lters for the analog voltages Converter T2 generates an unregulated 9V used for the front end Schottky diodes and CR2 provide reverse polarity protection for T2 C10 and C11 filter the isolated 9V in order to reduce the ripple on each supply Caps C17 and C19 on the input of the two DC DC converters are necessary to reduce the ripple reflected back on to the system 5V This noise is generated due to the transient nature of the MS 3 loading Communication The interface signals to and from the MS 3 are isolated 2500V AC by two optocouplers U1 and U2 The optocouplers include integrated Schmitt triggers at the outputs This provides logic compatible waveforms without the need for external pull up resistors NANDS are used in the transmission lines to provide the necessary inversions for proper signal polarity and to force the optocouplers normally off The low duty cycle of the signals also holds the power requirements to reasonable levels Communications with the SpO2 Module take place by a CMOS level asynchronous serial link from J1 The parameters are 8 data bits no parity one stop bit with the data having true polarity The baud rate is fixed at 9600 bps Display Controller Connections A four pin right angled connector J4 is available to interface with the future Display Controller board The serial information received TX and RX will be used to generate pleth waveform The control signal SpO2_COMM wil
184. lus Service Manual Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance Printed in U S A 0070 10 0429 Rev AC September 20 2007
185. mation is not erased 15 minutes Time Out LEDs and LCD Characters when unit is powered from the internal battery Set how long the numeric informa tion is displayed when no keys have been pressed in the LEDs and LCD before they are blanked to conserve energy The choices are 5 15 20 or 30 minutes NOTE The information is not erased 5 minutes 1231 represents 12 montbs 31 days and 3112 represents 31 days 12 months Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 User Configuration Number Function Description Factory Default 5 Time Out Light in the LCD when the unit is powered from AC mains Set how long the light will stay on when no keys are pressed in the LCD The choices are 3 5 10 or 15 minutes 3 minutes Time Out Light in the LCD when the unit is powered from the internal battery Set how long the light will stay on when no keys are pressed in the LCD The choices are 3 5 10 or 15 minutes 3 minutes Adult Initial Inflation Pressure Set the initial cuff inflation pressure for an adult size patient The choices are 100 to 260 mmHg at 5 mmHg increments 180 mmHg Pediatric Initial Inflation Pressure Set the initial cuff inflation pressure for a pediatric size patient The choices are 60 to 180 mmHg at 5 mmHg increments 140 mmHg Neonate Initial Inflation Pressure S
186. mode After the year has been selected the next press of the Timer Temp key 32 exits the clock set mode and enters the new Press to Change information Figure 1 20 Setting the Minute To cancel a changed value while that value is still displayed press the DEFAULTS key 14 for less than 3 seconds If the TIMER TEMP or Arrow keys have not been pressed for 15 seconds the Accutorr Plus returns to normal operation and saves any Time Date changes When the clock is displayed it displays real time current time When the clock is displayed while viewing previous data frozen time is displayed When frozen time is displayed the colon between the hours and minutes is illuminated continuously When real time is displayed the colon between the hours and minutes flashes Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 1 3 14 BATTERY OPERATION When the Accutorr Plus is powered from the battery the Battery Indicator 17 is illuminated continuously To conserve power most displays will blank time out at user selected times The LCD illumination time out can be set between 3 and 15 minutes The LED displays time out can be set between 5 and 60 minutes Since the Accutorr Plus can be powered from either an AC or DC source the user configuration allows the setting of separate times for each type of power source See User Configuration section 3 15 for more information on setting the tim
187. n LED s on the keypad are driven by four MAXIM ICM7218A LED Display Drivers three on the CPU board and one on the keypad These drivers accept parallel data in a serial format and drive common anode displays A no decode feature is available on this device which allows for greater flexibility in controlling each individual segment The writes are performed via U11 The scan rate of the LED s is 250 Hz with a duty time of 500us typically Also the drivers can enter a shutdown mode where typically 10uA is needed per device The write signals WR LED 0 3 must be active low for 200ns min Data bus D 0 7 must be setup 250ns with respect to the write signal rising edge The LED drivers are mapped to the CS IO of the MC68302 and is configured for 4 wait states As discussed above WR LEDO must be active low for 200ns min WR LEDO will become active upon DS going low DS will go low 1ns after S4 rising edge There will be 5 5 clock periods from 54 rising edge This amounts to 343 75ns 41ns 302 75ns min that WR LEDO will be active low for This meets the write strobe timing As discussed above data must be valid 250ns to WR LEDO rising edge Data is written by the MC68302 30ns after S4 rising edge S rising edge to S6 falling edge is 343 75ns Therefore data is valid 313 75ns min before WR LEDO rising edge which is greater than 250ns DS1 DS6 are 7 segment 0 8 high Red LEDs DS7 DS9 are 7 segment 0 56 high Red LEDs
188. n OR 313 AC ime e 12V 5 5 0146 00 0043 features 5 0014 00 0225 Li lon AC Hot 3 Shaded blocks are considered na zugc2gosdossou t black box devices 1 14411143481 Electro luminescent 106 VAC lu nc eases S E panel lite CAPTIVE CABLE S t TOU VAC 9 cH 5 c Speaker LCD Display BRU N LCD lite Off NIBP Board P Gnd Module 5T 0670 00 0584 02 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board 24 i 0160 00 0034 lgs 0670 00 1134 a CAPTIVE CABLE 38 i g89988BNNSREBNVSGeuqcar gcge o v o0sovc t imm 5 35339 9292222588 6278838 a alalalalal al aval 99 5 35435 D O Gy 288 a d 9 5 1 99 VIVI viv vy v v d 8 d ora 8 g a Ei 19759 238 8 a5 a lt g D 5 9 3 SRSSEBSNSRPBNNSZ2suscarc 2o9i998ow t on Ss CPU LED Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without pole SBBNBRRBRVSSSISHESRISCPVETEON S 5975 46 25884229850 822880299999899999525322222225 29335 eg 2944544 ux 1959 3850295558 S Seg 28 mE 8 3 A mg
189. nly IEC Italian 0998 00 0444 36 0998 00 0444 L36 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 06 NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO IEC Swedish 0998 00 0444 57 0998 00 0444 L57 0331 00 0103 0330 00 0027 07 NIBP Trend LCD IEC Swedish 0998 00 0444 47 0998 00 0444 L47 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 07 NIBP only IEC Swedish 0998 00 0444 37 0998 00 0444 L37 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 07 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 With NELLCOR 5 02 only Monitor Configuration Monitor Part Number Keypad Part Number Graphic Panel Part Number NIBP Trend LCD DSCP SpO IEC English 0998 00 0444 55 0998 00 0444 L55 0331 00 0103 0330 00 0027 01 NIBP Trend LCD IEC English 0998 00 0444 45 0998 00 0444 L45 0331 00 0102 0330 00 0026 01 NIBP Only TEC English 0998 00 0444 35 0998 00 0444 L35 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 01 NIBP Trend LCD NELLCOR SpO2 USA IEC English 0998 00 0444 61 0998 00 0444 L61 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 01 NIBP Trend LCD NELLCOR SpO2 IEC German 0998 00 0444 62 0998 00 0444 L62 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 02 NIBP Trend LCD NELLCOR SpO2 IEC Spanish 0998 00 0444 63 0998 00 0444 L63 0331 00 0108 0330 00 0027 03 NIBP Trend LCD NELLCOR SpO2 IEC French 0998 00 0444 64 0998 00 0444 L64 0331 00 0108
190. nnected 8851 Sensor Off Sensor not on patient Datascope and Masimo SpO only 8852 Interference Interference on signal Datascope and Masimo SpO2 only 8853 Pulse Search Unit cannot find signal Nellcor SpO2 Module will report Pulse Search 8853 when the sensor is not on the patient 8854 Weak Pulse Weak pulse detected Datascope and Masimo 5 only 8855 No Pulse No pulse detected Datascope SpO2 only 8856 Check Sensor Sensor problem Datascope and Masimo SpO only 8857 PR 30 Pulse rate is less than 30 bpm Datascope SpO only 8857 PR 21 Pulse rate is less than 21 bpm Nellcor SpO only 8857 PR 26 Pulse rate is less than 26 bpm Masimo SpO 2 only 8858 PR gt 249 Pulse rate is greater than 249 bpm Nellcor SpO only 8858 gt 239 Pulse rate is greater than 239 bpm Masimo SpO only 8858 gt 250 Pulse rate is greater than 250 bpm Datascope SpO2 only SYSTEM 984 NIBP Hardware Failure NIBP A D failure detected 985 NIBP Overpressure The overpressure circuit is not set to the current patient size Circuit not Programmed 986 NIBP Overpressure The two pressure transducers are not tracking each other Circuit not Tracking 987 Stop Hardware Excessive cuff pressure detected by hardware over pressure sen Overpressure sor A triple beep tone is generated 988 TEMP Bad Calibration Thermometer needs calibration 990 T
191. nnector Allows for A C power cord connection Communications Connector Provides compatible communications to external devices and hospital s information system Datascope Connector Used by Datascope Technical Service Personnel Pole Mounting Handle and Cam Provides the ability to quickly mount the Accutorr Plus to a rolling pole Recorder Module Connector Used to connect the optional Datascope recorder module Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 2 3 Predictive Thermometer Module Figure 1 6 Predictive Thermometer Module 49 Probe Cover Holder Used to store a box of probe covers Probe Chamber sed to store the temperature probe when not in use U Probe Connector U sed to connect the thermometer probe to the PTM module Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 2 4 Recorder Module Figure 1 7 Recorder Module 52 Paper Door Open this door when loading recorder paper 53 Paper Tear Edge The paper tear edge is used to tear off printed recorder strips The edge can be removed in the event of a paper jam that needs to be cleared Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 OPERATION This section of the Service Manual provides guidelines and step by step instructions for proper operation of
192. ntenance Schedule 8 3 1 Mechanical and Physical Visual Inspection 8 3 2 Electrical Safety and Performance Checks Six Month Interval 8 2 8 3 3 Electrical Safety and Performance Checks One Year Interval 8 8 1 INTRODUCTION The intent of this procedure is to ensure that the product continues to be safe and effective in it s intended environment Complete knowledge of the instrument characteristics and it s relationship to the clinical environment are useful in determining changes in the performance of the monitor and the clinical limitations of the device As a general rule the instrument is not tested to the full limits of it s capabilities at each service interval Rather representative points are tested and the results recorded It is important to note that while not all functions are tested to the absolute limits every function and option should be exercised Declining performance over time is frequently the first indication of the need for more extensive service action 8 2 LIMITATIONS OF PHYSIOLOGICAL SIMULATORS The physiological simulator is the principle aid for problem solving Simulators have many of the same limitations as the devices that they will test It is imperative that the simulator correlate well to a Reference Standard The electronic simulators available attempt to replicate a broad spectrum of indices representative of normal and abnormal physiological events within the interpretation of the manufact
193. ocking and polarized 4 Pin 19 20 0151 00 0115 TRANSISTOR 2N7000 MOSFET 04 Q6 Q7 21 0151 00 0195 TRANSISTOR IRLD014 N channel Q1 Q5 power MOSFET 22 0151 01 0010 TRANSISTOR IRFD1 10 Q2 N channel MOSFET 23 0153 00 0001 DIODE 1N4003 D1 D8 24 0153 00 0014 DIODE 1N4148 D10 25 0153 00 0085 DIODE 1N6263 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 26 0153 00 0193 DIODE Zener 1N4749A D9 27 28 0155 00 0053 IC LM324A Quad OpAmp U4 29 0155 00 0107 IC LM311 Comparator U8 30 0155 00 0404 IC DG201A Analog Switch U5 U7 31 0155 00 0443 IC LT1014 Quad OpAmp U1 U3 32 0155 00 0805 02 IC Dual picoamp input current U2 OpAmp AD706 33 0155 00 0845 02 IC TLC2543 12 bit A D converter U6 34 0155 00 0858 IC LT1004 2 5 2 5 V micropower U12 voltage reference 35 0283 04 0334 CAPACITOR 0 33uF 10 50V C53 Ceramic 36 0283 04 0104 CAPACITOR 0 1uF 10 100V C4 C6 C8 C10 C11 C13 C14 C17 C18 C20 Ceramic C21 C22 C25 C29 C31 C32 C33 C34 C51 C52 37 0283 04 0224 CAPACITOR 0 22uF 10 50V C12 Ceramic Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 25 NIBP Circuit Board Assembly 0670 00 0584 02 Item Part Number Description Reference No 38 0283 04 0474 CAPACITOR 0 47uF 10 50V C7 C19 C23 C24 C48 C50 Ceramic 39 0283 05 0101 CAPACITOR 100pF 10 200V C9
194. of the body such as ears nose or toes It also controls the remultiplexer CHNLMUX and provides calibration signal CAL which is used by the sequencer to determine the operation mode and test signal DIAG which supplies a fixed voltage source at demultiplexer input for circuit diagnostics Again because the control registers can synchronously control the remultiplexer and gain values for ac and dc gain stages different gain settings can be selected for red and infrared signals An interference detector monitors the output of current to voltage preamp for voltages less than negative 7 2 V in amplitude This information is sent to the digital section through signal The patient probe signal enters the board as current pulses After the signal goes through the current to voltage preamp stage it is separated by the demultiplexer circuit which steers each voltage pulse to one of two signals IR CH or RD CH In addition the circuit sends a negatively amplified version of the signal level between LED pulses to both channels This residual signal is caused by ambient light on the photo detector and offset voltages from the preceding circuitry The negative amplification sets up cancellation of the extraneous effect of the residual signal by the filter circuits that follow Signals IR CH and RD CH are then filtered identically by two parallel and matched filters The filters also reduce the effect of any noise source which might interfere with
195. oglobin or intra vascular dyes such as indocyanine green methylene blue exposure to excessive illumination such as surgical lamps especially ones with a Xenon light source bilirubin lamps florescent lights infrared heating lamps or direct sunlight excessive patient movement venous pulsations electro surgical interference and placement of a sensor on an extremity that has a blood pressure cuff arterial catheter or intra vascular line CAUTION In certain situations in which perfusion and signal strength are low such as in patients with thick or pigmented skin inaccurately low SpO2 readings will result Verification of oxygenation should be made especially in preterm infants and patients with chronic lung disease before instituting any therapy or interventation CAUTION If the sensor or patient cable is damaged in any way discontinue use immediately To prevent damage do not soak or immerse the sensor in any liquid solution DO NOT ATTEMPT TO STERILIZE 3 The digital SpO value and SpO2 Pulse Rate will be displayed on the SpO2 and Pulse Rate LED s 4 If desired adjust the beep volume See Section 3 7 Setting the Alarm Volume and Beep Volume for details on adjusting the beep volume Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 10 2 1 NELLCOR Sensors NELLCOR provides a family of sensors suitable for a wide variety of clinical settings and patients Specific sensors have been develo
196. oller REC Converter RECT Central Processing Unit REG SLA Decoder STG Differential STK Diastolic SUP Diode SW Digital to Analog SYST Electrolytic TANT Erasable Programmable TRANS Read Only Memory TRANSIS FXD Fixed VAR VIA L C Integrated Circ INT CKT Integrated Circuit KYBD Keyboard ILED Light Emitting Diode Li Ion Lithium Ion MF Metal Filml Monostable Mylar Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Term Network Operational Push Button Peripheral Interface Adapter Potentiometer Pressure Power Random Access Memory Receiver Rectangular Regulated RES Resistor Sealed Lead Acid Stage Stacked Supply Switch Systolic Tantalum Transistor Transistor Variable Versatile Interface Adapter Transducer Transformer Crystal Transistor Revised 12 20 00 o fe N N Ke x KEYPAD 4 V GRAPHIC 2 YR OB OVERLAY NUNC INE 2 T AN Vb 2 Ux X M D O D D 9 Vb ee uit 4 P NIBP Ih CIRCUIT X E P a a T a Cleese S b LCD DISPLAY SHIELD 33 29 P EN d 87 COMPRESSOR LCD 2 POWER 35 SUPPLY _ COMPRESSOR CABLE AP 7 15 A25 7 BRA
197. on mode smooth pulsation data update alarm limits determine systolic mean diastolic report alarm status pressure and heart rate report data check alarm conditions 4 Transmit Receive data to from Temperature module 5 Manage Recorder functions 6 Manage Keypad interface Drive Seven Segment LED Provide RS232 communications to PC and support software download Support Service Diagnostics 2 2 1 3 Detailed Hardware Description Microcontroller U1 Device U1 is an MC68302 which contains a 68000 core CPU a 24 bit address bus and a 16 bit data bus Clock oscillator Y2 shall operate at a clock speed of 16MHz which is used to clock U1 Three serial channels are used One for communication to the temperature modules via J4 The second for communication to an external port for PC applications via J3 The third for communication to the SpO2 module The MC68302 also offers a Serial Communication Port SCP which interfaces to the NIBP A D The recorder interface is via the IDMA channel with buffering through a transceiver of all data to the recorder The power on reset to the microcontroller and the rest of the system is generated by a 051239 micromanager U19 The DS1239 also acts as a watchdog to the microcontroller The ST input must see a high to low transition every 100ms maximum by the ST WDOG signal an addressable signal from the microcontroller otherwise a reset will be generated Upon a reset bot
198. onmental exposure perfusion patterns ambient temperature etc The least variable and therefore most accurate is the small deep area of warmest but still visible tissue A conventional ear thermometer takes many readings of the same large area which includes the high gradient distal ear tissue resulting in low non reproducible and inaccurate temperature readings The AccuTemp utilizes a narrow field of view and scanning capability to search the ear for the small deep area of warmest tissue required for heat balance calculation to ensure highly accurate and reproducible arterial temperatures The temperature measurement will remain on the display for a minimum of 55 and a maximum of 65 seconds after the Start button is released If using the AccuTemp with and Accutorr Plus the temperature measurement can be transferred from the AccuTemp to the Accutorr Plus for display and entry in to the trend database by placing the AccuTemp in its holder within the 60 seconds after releasing the Start button A beep tone is sounded from the Accutorr Plus once the temperature measurement information 4 6 Added 6 25 99 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information has been received by the Accutorr Plus NOTE Do not change Room Number and or Bed Letter on the Accutorr Plus during the transmission of temperature data The AccuTemp can be used to take temperature measurements for up to 128 power cycles without having to be put back into its ho
199. ons Recorder 0670 00 0661 01 SpO2 Circuit 1838 esos Units with Trend display and dH 5 oP 5 circuit board HRE ZO RES No SpO2 0331 00 0102 222 Wes Board E 5 8 36 lt 3 T 0670 00 0583 i 5 od EI Units with Trend display and gt 0530 00 0027 0670 00 0593 03 8 EP D 80 N SpO2 0331 00 0103 S S S sie ee ae a EE ne scu il me pee gg So Cg E Units without Trend display 3 9 8 J and No SpO2 0331 00 0104 0330 00 0025 g 3 8 5 e m 2 5 gt lt E 3 U 299 2 11 gzg 2 25 3 o E a 3 e 88492 a D Temp Probe receptacle o 9 20D 442983 0012 00 0953 WITH 9V battery 5 5 5 8 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT battery poc Qum O 528 Q m o 2 Sensor receptical m E Accutorr Plus with Datascope g 2 and without SpO2 E Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 2 3 Accutorr Plus with NELLCOR SpO2 or without SpO2 Interconnect Diagram 10 8 V Battery Lithium lon 0146 00 0069
200. ons occur immediately remove the sensor and find an alternate site NOTE Check the sensor site more frequently on infant and active patients Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 1 Operation Incorrect placement can also reduce the acquired sensor signal and therefore compromise performance Select an alternate site toe or use a FLEXISENSOR SD if the sensor can not be placed on the patient s finger correctly or if the fingernails interfere with the acquisition of a reliable signal Use of the DATASENSOR is not recommended for long term monitoring 4 6 hours For monitoring situations exceeding 4 6 hours either reposition the DATASENSOR every 2 4 hours to a different site finger toe or use a FLEXISENSOR SD with its appropriate bandage Do notover tighten the sensor bandages Excessive pressure on the monitoring site can affect SpO2 readings and may reduce readings below true SpO2 Excessive pressure can also result in pressure necrosis and other skin damage Sensor configuration provides virtually uninterrupted monitoring during following situations Electro cautery Noise Electro cautery noise rejection is designed into the sensors Motion Artifact The monitor s software adjusts the averaging period increasing it during motion and reducing it during inactivity This decreases the number of monitoring interruptions and false alarms Weak Peripheral Pulses The monitor s gain is automatically increased to
201. ontact angle the probe slightly after insertion Insertion depth is recommended at to 3 4 for adults and 1 4 to 1 2 for children A lubricant may be used if desired The measurement will proceed 1 44 Sublingual Pocket Figure 1 14 Probe Placement for Oral Temperatures RC ee Figure 1 15 Probe Placement for Rectal Temperatures Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation similarly to the oral measurement and the final reading will be displayed when the display stops flashing 6 AXILLARY TEMPERATURES Using the RED rectal probe install a new probe cover in the normal manner Have the patient raise his her arm Place the probe tip in the axilla pressing gently to assure good contact Have the patient lower his her arm holding the probe in position almost parallel to the arm The measurement will proceed similarly to the oral measurement and the final reading will be displayed when the display stops flashing NOTE It is important that the tip of the probe does not come into contact with a heat source i e hands or finger prior to taking a temperature If this should happen allow at least 5 seconds for the tip to cool before proceeding with the reading NOTE The thermometer will turn itself off about 3 minutes after turning it on or when the probe is returned to the probe chamber 50 Always store the probe in the chamber or disconnect it completely to obtain maximum batte
202. or s LEDs is adjusted automatically to compensate for differences in tissue thickness Each sensor is calibrated when manufactured the effective mean wavelength of the red LED is determined and encoded into a calibration resistor in the sensor plug The instrument s software reads this calibration resistor to determine the appropriate calibration coefficients for the measurements obtained by that sensor Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Revised 02 15 00 1 3 10 3 Sequence for establishing SpO2 with Masimo Set Pulse Oximetry This feature applicable only if available or installed on your unit 1 Select the appropriate sensor for the patient from the table below All sensors below are non sterile and can be used during patient movement MASIMO SENSOR FAMILY SELECTION PART NUMBER PATIENT SIZE DISPOSABLE REUSABLE LNOP eAdt Adult 0600 00 0043 01 gt 30 kg Disposable Disposable Finger Sensor LNOP ePdat Pediatric 0600 00 0044 01 10 to 50 kg Disposable Slender Digit Disposable Sensor LNOP eNeo Neonatal 0600 00 0045 01 10 kg Disposable Disposable Sensor LNOP eNeoPt Neonatal 0600 00 0046 01 lt 1 kg Disposable Pre term Disposable Sensor LNOP eDCI Adult 0600 00 0047 gt 30 kg Re usable Reusable Finger Sensor PC12 Patient Cable 0012 00 1099 02 All Re usable Extension 2 Attach the PC12 Patient Cable P N 0012 00 1099 02 to the sensor and pl
203. orr Plus Service Manual Introduction Revised 09 20 07 This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Introduction 1 0 OPERATION CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER 1 1 Introduction 1 2 Controls and Indicators 1 3 Operation 1 1 INTRODUCTION This section of the Service Manual P N 0070 00 0429 is provided as a review of the Accutorr Plus NIBP the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 functions and operation The reader is encouraged to refer to the Operating Instructions P N 0070 00 0428 for more complete details Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 06 25 99 Chapter 1 Operation This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS This section of the Service Manual identifies and describes each control and display of the Datascope Accutorr Plus NIBP the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO For step by step operating instructions see Chapter 1 3 Operation The following is a list of all controls connectors and indicators their item number and the page number The item number refers to the call outs on the drawings within this chapter The page number refers to the page where the description of the item can be found CONTROL CONTROL FRONT PANEL 30 Mute Key NIBP Systolic Display 31 Mute Indicator NIBP Di
204. orr Plus Service Manual Revised 9 20 07 Chapter 7 Calibration 7 6 PREDICTIVE THERMOMETER VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION The first Temperature Accuracy Verification with the Predictive Temperature Simula tor is a very quick method to confirm that the PTM is operating within the specified limits The PTM simulator is a Datascope proprietary test device available for purchase from the company The Predictive Temperature Simulator P N 0454 00 0017 has not been released for sale to customers in CE countries The second method called the Water Bath Method utilizes laboratory grade stirred water bath to confirm that the PTM is operating within the specified limits In case of failure or inaccuracy of readings the System Calibration Procedure may be followed to re adjust the device to factory specifications This procedure requires high accuracy test equipment and therefore it is not recommended for field calibration Datascope offers a comprehensive factory service program to support this product 7 6 1 Temperature Accuracy Verification with the Predictive Temperature Simulator Measure the battery in the Predictive Thermometer module verify that the voltage is 8 6 V or greater NOTE Newer modules do not contain a 9V battery Skip this step Install the Predictive Temperature Module onto the Accutorr Plus and turn on the monitor Remove the temperature probe from the probe holder and disconnect the connector from the Predi
205. orrection Kora 1 058 Rectal temperature correction Krectal 1 095 The standard Datascope infrared thermometer is calibrated to indicate Core temperature thus the correction factor to be used is K 1 087 10 Calculate the display temperature according to the following formula K Tr TA TA Tdcalc where is Calculated Display Temperature Kcore 1 087 Correction Factor for Core Temperature is Target Temperature TA is Ambient Temperature Sample Calculation Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration Ambient temperature TA measured 72 Water Bath temperature TT measured 98 6 Correction Factor Kcore 1 087 1 087 98 6 72 72 100 9 thus Temperature displayed by thermometer is 100 9 and calculated temperature is 100 9 the accuracy has been verified Temperature value deviations The calculated value is a function of the accuracy of the water bath temperature As an example a 1 reading error of water temperature will result ina 1 F reading input into the formula resulting in a final calculated values of 99 9 to 101 9 F With a display resolution of 1 digit and an over all resolution of 0 2 the final calculated reading may fall between 98 6 and 102 2 7 6 5 Low Battery Sensing The low battery threshold is not adjustable When the battery has reached the low battery threshold U4 and Q2 report this condition to the CPU on the Accutorr Plus Accutorr Plus
206. orrection factor shown in table 7 13 to obtain the calibrated measurement Celsius Readouts Fahrenheit Readouts Range Subtract Range Subtract 32 0 to 41 0 0 6 89 6 to 102 0 1 1 41 0 to 43 0 0 5 102 1 to 106 0 1 0 106 0 to 110 0 5 Table 7 13 4 Compare readouts after correction factors are calculated Proceed to System Calibration Procedure if readings are out of specification 7 6 3 System Calibration Procedure 1 Connect a fresh 9 volt battery an external power supply set to 9 1V to the predictive thermometer NOTE Newer modules do not contain a 9V battery Skip this step Set SW2 3 to closed position the switch is towards the PCB Connect resistor decade box to the temperature probe connector Set the decade box to 8343 ohms 2 ohms NOTE All other settings of SW2 should be in the open position away from the PCB Connect the DVM to J4 2 and J4 7 output jacks Jumper J4 2 and ground terminal J2 1 jacks Switch power supply on Adjust until a reading of 100 mV 5 mV is on the DVM Adjust the decade box to 4746 ohms 2 ohms Record the voltage displayed on the DVM Connect the DVM lead to J4 4 Adjust R2 until the DVM reading is the same as the one recorded in step 7 1mV 9 Remove all jumpers and test leads The calibration is completed 10 Set the decade box back to 8343 ohms Power cycle the unit switch off then on The
207. oval of the LCD Display Assembly and Back Light 5 4 11 Removal of the SpO2 Circuit Board 40 Removal and Replacement of the Internal Sealed Lead Acid or Li Ion Battery Removal of the AC Input Receptacle Assembly 16 4 12 Thermal Printer Optional Module Thermometer Predictive Optional Module AccuTemp IR Infrared Thermometer optional module AccuTemp IR Mounting Cradle Accutorr Plus Service Manual Introduction Revised 12 20 00 Revised 9 20 07 4 6 17 Communication Board 45 ASSEMBLY AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REPLACEMENT PARTS Introduction Available Replacement Parts and Sub Assemblies Product Variations and Options Exchange Program Replacement Parts Pricing Information Ordering Information Abbreviations Isometric Drawings and Parts List 6 8 1 6 8 2 6 8 3 6 8 4 6 8 5 6 8 6 Accutorr Plus Isometric Parts List All Models Recorder Module Isometric Parts List Predictive Temperature Module Isometric Parts List 6 15 Mobile Stand Type 1 Gray Base Assembly Parts List 6 17 Mobile Stand Type 2 Black Base Assembly Parts List 6 19 Mounting Options Circuit Board Parts Lists CALIBRATION Introduction Warnings and Guidelines Test Equipment and Special Tools Required Power Up Sequence Internal Testing Service Diagnostics 7 24 7 2 2 Jiu 7 5 4 T 7 5 6 7 5 6 1 9241 7 5 8 7 5 9 tid AD Tadd 7242 Introduction Hidden Key Software Version Test 0a Ob
208. ow Power Transceiver RS485 U5 LTC485 11 0155 00 0692 IC QUAD 2 Input NAND GATE U4 74HCT08 12 0155 00 0958 02 IC MAX239 Multichannel RS232 U2 Driver Receiver 13 0155 00 0960 02 IC MAX1771 DC DC Controller U1 High Efficiency 14 0283 00 0056 Capacitor SMD 0805 Ceramic 1 9 10 12 15 16 C13 14 02 ONLY 0 1UF 20 15 0287 00 1103 Capacitor SMD 0805 Ceramic X7R C7 C11 C18 10 0 01UF 16 0289 02 6106 Capacitor SMD Tantalum 20 C3 10UF 35 VDC 17 0289 00 3106 Capacitor SMD Tantalum 20 C5 10UF 18 0289 00 3475 Capacitor SMD Tantalum 20 C6 4 7UF 19 0289 02 4336 Capacitor SMD Tantalum 2095 C2 C4 C17 33UF 20 0289 00 5226 Capacitor SMD Tantalum 20 C8 22UF 21 0327 00 0R10 Resistor SMD 1 4W 5 Low Value R1 0 1 22 0326 00 0121 Resistor SMD Thick FILM 1 10W R8 5 120 23 0326 00 0472 Resistor SMD Thick FILM 1 10W R10 596 4 7K 24 0326 01 1000 Resistor SMD Thick FILM 1 10W R9 196 100 25 0326 01 1002 Resisotr SMD Thick FILM 1 10W R4 R6 1 10K 26 0326 01 2003 Resistor SMD Thick FILM 1 10W R3 1 200K 27 0326 01 2802 Resistor SMD Thick FILM 1 10W R2 1 28K 28 0388 00 0661 PCB Communications Module Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 35 Power Supply Sealed Lead Acid 0014 00 0184
209. paper used We recommend that the standard Datascope chart paper for this printer be used for the print test 7 5 7 Pump Test 5 Select Room Number 5 and press NIBP Start key to activate the test This test evaluates the ability of the pump to pressurize a fixed volume represen tative of an adult cuff to a typical adult pressure A fixed volume of 700 cc is pumped to a pressure of 300 mmHg While the pump is operational the elapsed time is displayed in the Timer Temperature display When the target pressure is reached the elapsed time display holds its current reading and the pump deflates the chamber for another test The test passes if the chamber is inflated in less than 35 seconds Pressing the deflate key at any time during the test causes the NIBP module to open all valves and ends the test Pressing and holding the deflate key for three 3 seconds clears the MAP display and exits the test Bleed Rate Test 6a 6b Press the NIBP Start key to activate the selected test See table 7 6 This test evaluates the ability of the instrument to maintain a constant bleed rate for the purpose of accurate and repeatable NIBP measurements This test also evaluates the ability of the system to reduce cuff pressure quickly Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration A fixed volume of 700 is pumped to approximately 20 mmHg over the specified start pressure see table 7 6 then vented to atmosphere through one of two diffe
210. ped for neonates infants children and adults OXISENSOR oxygen transducers um sterile adhesive sensors with optical components mounted on adhesive tape OXIBAND oxygen transducers and the DURAFORM oxygen transducer SSH are reusable sensors that are applied with disposable adhesive The DURASENSOR DS 100A adult digit oxygen transducer is reusable sensor with its optical components mounted in a plastic casing The NELLCOR RS 10 reflectance oxygen transducer is an adhesive sensor for application to forehead or temple NOTE NELLCOR OXIBAND and DURASENSOR are registered trademarks of NELLCOR Incorporated OXISENSOR and DURAFORM are trademarks of NELLCOR Incorporated A Selecting a Sensor Sensors are designed for specific sites on patients with designated weight ranges To select the appropriate sensor consider the patient s weight level of activity adequacy of perfusion which sensor sites are available whether sterility is required and the anticipated dura tion of monitoring B Cleaning and Re Use Do not immerse any PUSISEINSOR DURASENSOR OXIBAND or DURA FORMEN oxygen transducer the NELLCOR RS 10 oxygen transducer or any NELLCOR adhesive in water or cleaning solution Clean DURASENSOR OXIBAND and DURAFORM oxygen transducers and the NELLCOR RS 10 oxygen by wiping with a disinfectant such as uc alcohol Do not sterilize by irradiation steam or ethylene oxide Use a new OXIBAND adh
211. place as needed Outer case of Accutorr Plus Recorder and Temperature module e Patient connected accessories such as blood pressure cuffs and hoses and related connectors Check the SpO2 sensor and cables Check the temperature cables and probes Verify and replenish the disposable items as needed IE probe covers recorder chart supply Power cords external safety ground connections and communication cables 8 3 2 Electrical Safety and Performance Checks One Year Interval Line power and battery power indicator lights functional in the proper modes Line power and safety grounds are intact and within specifications Non invasive blood pressure section is functional within specifications SpO functions are operational and within specification Temperature functions are operational and within specifications Check the temperature module battery voltage under load replace if under 8 8 V Use only alkaline batteries NOTE Newer PTM modules do not contain a 9V battery Recorder is functional and documents available stored data Error codes failure messages end user reported anomalies are collected and analyzed for reduced performance trends Identify and correct causes as warranted Check recorder paper path and clean as required Perform ground resistance and chassis leakage tests Revised 2 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance This page intentionally left blank Accutorr P
212. r minus one standard deviation Plus or minus one standard deviation encompasses 6896 of the population The Masimo MS 3 pulse oximeter with LNOP Adt sensors has been validated for motion accuracy in human blood studies on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies while performing rubbing and tapping motions at 2 to 4 Hz At an amplitude of 1 to 2 cm and non repetitive motion between 1 to 5 Hz At an amplitude of 2 to 3 cm in induced hypoxia studies in the range of 70 to 10096 SpO2 against a laboratory co oximeter and ECG monitor This variation equals plus or minus one standard deviation Plus or minus one standard deviation encompasses 6896 of the population Revised 06 19 01 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications Battery Battery Type Number of Batteries Battery Voltage Battery Capacity Battery Run Times from full charge with a new battery at 25 C with 1 NIBP measurement every 5 minutes and recorder in use Recharge Time Cyclic Service Life Real Time Clock Resolution Accuracy Display Format Power Sealed Lead Acid 12 VDC nominal 2 3 Amp Hour Accutorr Plus NIBP 5 Hour Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen 3 Hours Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 Datascope 1 5 Hours Nellcor 2 Hours Masimo 2 Hours 8 hours max in standby only 150 cycles 100 to 20 of capacity 400 cycles 100 to 40 of capacity 1 minute 1 minute we
213. re optional 3 Shaded blocks are considered black box devices 10 8 V Battery Lithium lon 0146 00 0069 Interconnect Diagram OR 12 V Battery Lead Acid 0146 00 0043 AC AC Hot p1eog 18114 Tone Processor Board Tone Processor Board 0670 00 1134 shown but not used in all versions NIBP Board 0670 00 0584 02 LCD Display Module 5225 0160 00 0034 Sot CAPTIVE CABLE 6790 00 090 081000100 2 0901 Board 0670 00 0650 03 for units with SpO2 0670 00 0650 04 for units Without SSSNHUEBNSSS ry af circuit board 0670 00 0583 pupa FEE ui 6 5444 de dese d 13 14 oe 8 jp 5 0 i g AT ALN Mili I gt ON lt gt 0 z 9555 ag Battery shown but not Datascope H Za 49 3 i Sas used in all versions N Y 3 SpO2 Circuit 3258828 823 Unite with Trend display 4 Board Pop 3i 84 i No Sp02 0331 00 0102 22 Pee 99 0670 00 0593 03 89 ase x a amp z c EFE IT ut and No SpO2 0331 00 0104 5 m Cat ae i 9gs 2 5 EM Daz Temp Probe receptacle FEF v 3 aga 0012 00 0953 WITH 9 b
214. re shown on the System Block diagram which is located in chapter 2 of this manual Below are the tolerances for the voltages shown 5V 4 9 5 1 12 5 12 13 15 14 5 15 5 Perform Diagnostics Test 01 through 12 Repair replace circuits components that fail to pass the Diagnostic Test Trend circuits test Obtain a minimum of five NIBP measurements and simultaneous SpO and Temperature readings if the Accutorr has those options Confirm Trend storage function as explained in sections 1 3 6 To View and Deleted Stored Data Trend Mode and 1 3 12 Recorder Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 5 3 Isolating the Problems with Optional Accessory Modules 1 Predictive Temperature Module Test Obtain one or more temperature readings from the optional temperature modules They will be displayed in the temperature display window If the readings are not displayed replace the temperature probe first then the complete module Infrared Accutemp LR temperature module test The following paragraphs will assist you to separate those clinical issues that can result in inaccurate or inconsistent readings as well as instrument malfunctions Since there are no user serviceable components except 9V battery inside the Accutemp I R all service requests should be directed to the factory Recorder Module Test Obtain a print out of stored data or perform diagnostics test 4
215. rements taken once every 5 minutes Thisis doneto reduce the chance of surface vessel rupture petechia If it is desirable to maintain a fixed cuff inflation pressure the adaptive inflation feature may be disabled in this continuous mode 1 3 4 1 Canceling an Automatic NIBP Measurement To canca a scheduled measurement press the DEFLATE key 36 This will suspend the timed NIBP measurements until the START NIBP key 38 is pressed interval indicator will flash See section 1 3 4 4 for more details on the start and deflate function NOTE Pressing the DEFLATE key 36 will also end a measurement cycle that is already in progress take immediate measurement and to reactivate the Interval mode press the START NIBP key 38 The next timed measurement will be taken at the time set by the interval For example if the interval was set to 30 minutes the next timed measurenent will be 30 minutes after the START NIBP key was pressed N OTE If the Interval mode is no longer required set the interval to OFF prior to pressing the START NIBP key See section 3 4 for details on changing the interval mode Chapter 1 Operation NOTE If the DEFLATE key 36 is pressed it will take 10 seconds before another measurement can be taken The START NIBP INDICATOR 39 will be illuminated when ready NOTE When in the Interval mode and the Room Bed is changed the interval mode is suspended interval indicator flashes
216. rent selection for the SpO volume The selections are OFF 1 2 3 4 and 5 with 5 being the loudest 5 Pressthe MENU key 8 again to exit the menu and return to the T rend screen NOTE Any changes made to the alarm volume or the SpO volume will be erased when the unit is turned off and then back on again Also any changes made except off will restore and enablethe alarm tone regardless of prior mute condition Alarm Volume 7 a SpO2 Beep Volume Figurel 11 M Revised 05 22 02 Accutorr Plus Service M anual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 8 SETTING THE LCD CONTRAST View Angle Adjustment The LCD on the Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen can be adjusted for optimum viewing The MENU key 8 and the LCD Up and Down Arrow keys 9 amp 10 are used to adjust the contrast Press and hold the MENU key 8 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds A beep tone is generated when the key is first pressed and the display changes to the menu When a second beep tone is generated release the key To quickly adjust the contrast press and hold either the LCD Up or Down Arrow key 9 or 10 For fine adjustment momentarily press either the LCD Up or Down Arrow key The LCD contrast adjustment is saved by either pressing the MENU key 8 again or not pressing either the LCD UP or Down Arrow keys 9 amp 10 for 15 seconds NOTE The contrast setting will be the same each time the unit is turned on unless readju
217. rent valves During the test the MAP display indicates the real time system pressure and the Timer Temperature display indicates the elapsed time in seconds When the stop pressure is reached the MAP display is blanked and the elapsed time displays the current reading Pressing the Deflate key ends the test and deflates the chamber Pressing and holding the Deflate key for three seconds clears the MAP display and exits the test Each test is uniquely identified in the Patient Bed Letter Display as described in Table 7 6 The table identifies each test the corresponding start and stop pressures and required completion times Test Description Start Stop Time Test Sub Test Patient Pressure Pressure Sec Room Bed Letter mmHg mmHg Number Linear Bleed Valve 180 60 15 25 6 Test seconds Dump Valve Test 250 20 14 seconds max Table 7 6 7 5 8 Leak Test 7 Select Room Number 7 and press the NIBP Start key to activate the test This test evaluates the ability of the system to maintain a steady pressure A fixed volume is pumped up to an initial differential pressure of approximately 250 mmHg and monitored for a fixed period of time While the pump is operational peak pressure is displayed in the MAP display When the target pump pressure is reached the peak pressure is frozen in the MAP display during a five second dwell During leakage measurement the current pressure leakage is displayed in
218. ressure and exit the test Select diagnostic test 11 Room b Bed Press the Start NIBP key to start the MED calibration test Verify that the pump co mes on the pressure increases and then the pump stops After 10 seconds verify that the pressure settles between 100 mmHg and 200 mmHg Compare the pressure dis played to an accurate 0 2 external pressure gauge The pressure MAP LEDs read ing should agree within 1 with the external pressure gauge If it does not agree a failure has occurred and proceed to 7 5 15 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration Press the Deflate key to release the pressure and exit the test Select diagnostic test 11 Room c Bed Press the Start NIBP key to start HIGH calibration test Verify that the pump comes on the pressure increases and then the pump stops After 10 seconds verify that the pressure settles between 200 mmHg and 300 mmHg Compare the final pressure dis played to an accurate 0 2 external pressure gauge the MAP LEDs reading should agree within 1 with the external pressure gauge If it does not agree a failure has occurred and proceed to 7 5 15 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration Press the Deflate key to release pressure and exit the test 7 5 13 Verification of Accutorr Plus Pneumatic Performance using the Cufflink NIBP Simulator 114 Select Room Number 11 and Bed Letter d and press the NIBP Start key to activate the test For these tests program
219. ry life NOTE The thermometer will not take a reading if the patient temperature is less than 6 F 3 3 C above the ambient temperature Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation Figure 1 16 Probe Placement for Axillary Temperatures Figure 1 17 Probe Placement for Axillary Temperatures SRE ET a I ESL 1 45 1 3 12 RECORDER optional The Accutorr Plus can provide a permanent record of patient data using the PRINT key 12 There are two print modes available They are Continuous Print or Request Print In the Continuous Print mode the printer will print each time there is a valid NIBP or Temperature measurement In the Request Print mode the printer will print all of the stored information for the displayed patient Attach the Recorder Module as shown in section 1 3 17 Press the PRINT key 12 1 beep tone to generate a Request printing The recorder will print all stored measurements for the currently displayed patient Press the PRINT key 1 beep tone while a printing is in progress to stop the printing Press and hold the PRINT key 12 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds to switch the print mode between Continuous and Request When in the Continuous mode the Print LED 13 is illuminated NOTE When a printing is in progress and the PRINT key is pressed or Room Number and or Bed Letter is changed the printing will stop M D Y 11 25 97 2a HH MM DIA MAP The Date
220. s signal to the digital section The DAC thus performs a dual function It is used in both the subtraction and the comparator blocks Every 1 240 of a second the circuit s control functions are flipped to process the alternate component of the multiplexed signal The multiplexer switches signals the two microprocessor controlled gains are changed if necessary and a new digital code is sent to the DAC for use in the subtraction circuit After settling to it s new value the signal at the input of the comparator is frozen by the sample and hold circuit The DAC is now available to be used in the digitization At the next 1 240 second interval all the control signals revert to the previous values Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Figure 2 7 502 Block Diagram Digital Section The digital section of the board performs two distinct functions analog section control and interface to communications ic s This section is based on a 63CO9E microprocessor The analog section is accessed by writing data into the control registers Address decoding for generating control register strobes CTRL REGO CTRL REGI and CTRL REG2 is done by an address decoder The same address decoder is also responsible for monitoring status lines COMP and SAT THE 63CO9E can observe the status of these lines by reading RDO from the assigned memory location See Table XIV A watchdog timer chip
221. s On the Accutorr Plus NIBP use the Patient Info Up amp Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to scroll through the stored measurements for the selected patient On all models of the Accutorr Plus press and hold this key 2 beep tones approx 6 seconds to scan all of the rooms and beds for stored measurements Press the Data Scan key again to stop on a particular room bed Press the Data Scan key again to exit this view mode Data Scan Indicator This LED indicator is illuminated when viewing prior data Room Bed Number Key Press this key to change the displayed Room Bed After pressing this key use the Patient Info Up amp Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to change the Room Bed This key is also used when selecting a User Configuration item Bed Letter Display This display is used to show the current patient bed letter It is also used to display status codes for NIBP SpO and Temperature and to display User Configuration items Room Number Display This display is used to show the current patient room number It is also used to display status codes for NIBP SpO2 and Temperature indicates which alarm is being set Hi or Lo and displays a User Configuration item Patient Info Down Arrow Key This key is used to decrement the alarm limits when they are shown on the LED displays and to decrement the hours minutes month day and year in the clock set mode This key is also used to change the Room Bed to scroll through pre
222. s active 40ns max from S2 rising edge WR rising edge occurs when S6 falling edge occurs With one wait state as above for the flash memories there will be 3 5 clock periods Therefore CS RAM will be active 168 25ns compared to requirement of 90ns min This will meet the write timing CS to data valid is 55ns max for SRAM read Data will be valid 162 5ns max from CS RAM active low Therefore with 3 5 clock periods to S6 falling edge data will be valid 68 25ns before S6 falling edge This will meet the setup to S6 falling edge of 15ns min Battery Backup Circuit U17 is a regulator which must supply current during battery mode It supports the Real Time Clock U28 Micromanager U19 and the two SRAM s The RTC will draw luA Micromanager 20uA and the SRAM s 200uA Total current draw from U17 is 221uA max 017 can supply 30mA Vin 6V VBULK can supply 21mA max at the minimal voltage of 9 77V The current supplied by U17 will then be minimized to 21mA U17 maximum input voltage is 14 The maximum voltage at VBULK is 17V Therefore a resistor divider network of R11 and R12 is used in conjunction with Q7 to lower the voltage at U17 2 The maximum voltage at the Q7 base is 10 42V Minimum Vbe for Q7 is 0 65V Maximum Vin will be 9 77V which is lower than 14V as discussed above Micromanager U19 The micromanager is 051239 It performs four functions System power on off capability Watchdog functions Create
223. s software Although specific implementation details fall beyond the scope this document the following is an overview of the major tasks to be performed by the software The Microcontroller would normally be placed in a sleep state after initialization in the absence of a tone signal in order to conserve power Upon the presence of an advisory tone or an alarm an interrupt is generated which wakes up the device The amplitude and frequency of the incoming signal is analyzed then a replica of the input signal is generated after approximately 25ms delay and presented to the DAC The tone ramp up sequence is accomplished with dedicated I O ports which drives write commands and control bytes with an increasing count and to the DAC triggered by the period of the input tone This would result in an audible tone with rising amplitude Upon detection of the end of the tone burst the ramp down sequence is entered similar in nature to the ramp up sequence Added 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 3 0 SPECIFICATIONS CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER 5 1 Performance Specifications 3 2 Safety Characteristics 3 3 Physical Characteristics 3 4 Environmental Characteristics 3 5 Electrical Ratings 3 6 Agency Compliance 37 Electromagnetic Compatibility 3 1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Systolic Pressure Readout Number of Digits Accuracy Mean error less than 5 mmHg Standard deviation less than 8 mmHg
224. s the DATA SCAN key 22 1 beep tone The DATA SCAN Indicator 23 illuminates Press the Patient Info Up and Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to view stored data for the current patient The stored data is displayed in the Systolic Diastolic MAP Pulse Rate and Temp displays Consecutive presses or pressing and holding the UP or DOWN arrow will allow the stored measurements to continuously wrap around When the measurements wrap a double beep tone will sound If a temperature measurement is not available for the NIBP measurement that is displayed then is shown in the Interval Elap Time Temp display 33 To view the time of measurements press the TIME TEMP key 32 3 To exit the view stored data mode press the DATA SCAN key 22 1 beep Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 6 2 To View the Stored Measurements on the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and the Accutorr Plus NIBP with Trend Screen and SpO2 The stored measurements on the Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen are displayed in the LCD Up to 5 stored measurements are displayed at one time Measurements are displayed in time order with the newest measurement at the top A scroll bar with one or both arrows will display on the side of the LCD when more measurements are available to view When only one arrow displays more measurements are only available in the direction of the arrow 1 To view more measurements press
225. s used to switch between viewing the elapsed time or the temperature in the Interval Elap Time Temp Display When viewing stored measurements on the Accutorr Plus NIBP press this key to switch between viewing the temperature and time of the measurement Interval Elap Time Temp Display This displays the time in minutes since the last successful NIBP measurement Elap Time is illuminated When the Interval key is pressed the Elap Time changes to the current Interval setting Interval is illuminated When the Predictive thermometer probe is removed from its holder the Elap Time changes to Temp Temp is illuminated Either 85 0 F or 29 4 C will display this is an internal self test feature As the Predictive thermometer is taking a measurement the display will flash as the number increases When the final temperature measurement is determined the display will no longer flash and a beep tone is generated When the AccuTemp IR thermometer is used the temperature is not displayed until after the measurement is taken and the thermometer is placed back into its holder This display will also show the current time and date when setting the clock Interval Key Press to enter the set time interval mode An interval is set for automatic NIBP measurement cycles To sequence through the interval choices of OFF when set to display graphics CONT Continuous 1 2 5 5 10 15 20 30 60 120 and 240 minutes repeatedly pr
226. scriptions Power The power for the interface board is supplied by the system 5V It is used for the pull up resistors R1 R2 and R6 on the serial and control lines as well as the LED drive resistors R3 and R4 on optocoupler U1 It is also the input to isolation converters T1 and T2 In addition the system 5V is the supply voltage for optocoupler U2 and the logic gates in U3 T1 converts the unisolated system 5V into an isolated and regulated source 5DIG for many uses The converter provides suitable isolation to the specified patient limit of 1500VAC The majority of the current from 5DIG is delivered to the MS 3 board It also acts as the supply voltage for optocoupler U1 and the ESD protection array U5 In addition the digital voltage supplies the LED drive resistor R5 on optocoupler U2 The second largest usage for the 5DIG is as an input for che LT1373 The LT1373 isa high frequency current mode switching regulator running at approximately 250kHz In this design it is configured as an extremely efficient dual flyback converter It will convert a single input voltage ranging from 2 7 to 25 volts into a positive and negative output This design utilizes the feedback to provide 15 to the MS 3 board The power transistor switch integral to the LT13723 alternately charges and discharges the output capacitor C16 C12 and C13 provide the hold up time for the output voltages L2 C14 and L3 C15 are additional low pass fi
227. sed 12 20 00 6 43 Part Number Description Reference No 36 37 38 0361 09 0402 STANDOFF BROACHING TYPE PCB 39 0388 00 0716 PCB MASIMO INTERFACE BD REV 2 40 0361 32 0312 STANDOFF HEX M F NYLON 4 40 5 16 41 0220 22 0440 NUT HEX NYLON STANDARD 4 40 42 0361 32 0500 STANDOFF HEX M F NYLON 4 40 1 2 43 44 0060 00 1075 01 MODULE SPECIFICATION MASIMO INTERFACE BOARD 45 0060 00 1075 02 DESIGN SPECIFICATION MASIMO INTERFACE BOARD 46 0060 00 1075 03 WORST CASE ANALYSIS MASIMO INTERFACE BOARD 47 0060 00 1075 05 DESIGN VALIDATION MASIMO INTERFACE BOARD 48 0060 00 1075 06 PRODUCTION TEST SPECIFICATION MASIMO IN TERFACE BOARD 6 44 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Tone Processor Module 0670 00 1134 Part Number Description Reference No 1 0008 01 0003 TUBING HEAT SHRINK 062 ID 2 0008 01 0006 TUBING HEAT SHRINK 250 ID 3 0108 00 0067 FERRITE BEAD SMD L1 L3 4 0136 21 0008 CONNECTOR PC HEADER RIGHT ANGLE J4 SINGLE ROW 100 PITCH 5 0136 92 0003 CONN HDR STR LKG PLZD 6 0155 00 2127 IC AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER WITH SHUT 04 DOWN MODE 7 0155 00 0875 02 IC AD7528 DUAL 8 BIT MULTIPLYING DAC U2 8 0155 00 1010 01
228. sensors does not cause any penetration of the skin nor is there any electrical contact or transfer of excessive heat to the patient The sensor is composed of a dual light emitting diode LED emitter and a photo diode detector The emitter discharges two colors wave lengths of light into the patient s extremity finger toe ear The detector receives the light not absorbed by the blood or tissue components The Accutorr Plus model with SpO then uses the Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 02 15 00 Chapter 1 Operation relative absorption of the two light wavelengths to compute and display SpO2 functional saturation and Pulse Rate measurements The key benefits of the sensors are Electro Surgical Noise ESU Rejection The sensor configuration of both the DATASENSOR and the FLEXISENSOR SD provide uninterrupted monitoring and absence of false alarms during the use of ESU ESU can be set at any power level This design prevents electro surgical noise entering the monitor via the sensor and interfer ing with unit operation Monitoring Restless Patients Motion artifact rejection is achieved in several ways 1 The sensor design used with their recommended bandages assures a snug fit of the sensor to the patient Light emitting diodes LEDs and detectors gather a strong signal from the patient When in the presence of motion the software adjusts the averaging period increasing it to a maximum of 15 seconds d
229. simo SpO2 only 8857 PR 30 Pulse rate is less than 30 bpm Datascope SpO only 8857 PR 21 Pulse rate is less than 21 bpm Nellcor SpO only 8857 PR 26 Pulse rate is less than 26 bpm Masimo SpO only 8858 PR gt 249 Pulse rate is greater than 249 bpm Nellcor SpO only 8858 gt 239 Pulse rate is greater than 239 bpm Masimo SpO only 8858 gt 250 Pulse rate is greater than 250 bpm Datascope SpO2 only SYSTEM 984 NIBP Hardware Failure NIBP A D failure detected 985 NIBP Overpressure The overpressure circuit is not set to the current patient size Circuit not Programmed 986 NIBP Overpressure The two pressure transducers are not tracking each other Circuit not Tracking 987 Stop Hardware Excessive cuff pressure detected by hardware over pressure Overpressure sensor A triple beep tone is generated 988 TEMP Bad Calibration Thermometer needs calibration 990 TEMP Illegal Mode Thermometer switch is set wrong 991 TEMP Module Failed Thermometer internal failure Table 4 1 995 SpO Uncalibrated SpO fails calibration check Error Codes 996 SpO Failure SpO failed self test Revised 02 15 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 5 1 Isolating the Problem System Level 1 Determine if the problem is in the main NIBP unit or one of the add on accessories 2 If the problem is in th
230. sistor SMD Thick Film 1 10W R41 196 806K 90 0326 01 9533 Resistor SMD Thick Film 1 10W R76 196 953K 91 0388 00 0650 PCB CPU MODULE 92 0432 00 0005 MOUNTING 0 28 LED XDS13 XDS14 XDS15 93 0136 10 0023 MOUNTING 0 8 LED 2 per for DS2 amp DS4 DS3 amp DS5 and DS1 amp DS4 95 0155 90 0413 IC Programmed Accutorr U3 96 0155 90 0412 IC Programmed Accutorr U27 97 0136 10 0015 MOUNTING 0 56 LED for DS7 DS12 98 0012 00 1236 Cable Assembly Module 20 pin J4 IDC PC mount to 20 pin card edge receptacle 99 0326 01 2212 Resistor SMD Thick Film 1 22 1K R91 6 34 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Communication Board 0670 00 0661 01 Item Part Number Description Reference No 1 0012 00 1090 Cable Assembly RS232 9 PIN D J2 10 PIN IDC PC Mount 2 0012 00 1091 Cable Assembly 20 PIN IDC TO 20 J1 PIN IDC PC Mount 3 0108 00 0089 Inductor Dual Surface Mount 20UH L1 4 0136 92 0003 Connector PC Header Straight J3 Locking and Polarized 5 0151 00 0190 Transistor SMD Channel TMOS Q2 FET 2N7002 6 0151 00 0203 Transistor MMFT3055 MOSFET Q1 POWER Switching SMD 7 0153 00 0175 Diode SMD General Purpose D2 Switching D914 8 0153 00 0186 Diode 1N5819 Schottky Rectifier D1 D3 SMD MELF 9 0153 00 0211 Diode SM14Me24 Transient Voltage U3 Suppressor SMD 10 0155 00 0676 IC L
231. ssembly CPU Board with and without SpO 2 Schematic Communication Board Assembly Communication Board Schematic Main Power Supply Board Schematic Sealed Lead Acid Battery Main Power Suply Board Schematic Li Ion Battery Keyboard Schematics Nellcor Interface Board Assembly Nellcor Interface Board Schematic Masimo Interface Board Assembly Masimo Interface Board Schematic Tone Processor Board Assembly Tone Processor Board Schematic Datascope SpO2 Daughter Board Asembly Datascope 2 Daughter Board Schematic Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 5 Schematics Drawing Part Number 0670 00 0582 0387 00 0582 0387 00 0582 0670 00 0583 01 0670 00 0583 01 0670 00 0584 02 0387 00 0584 02 0670 00 0593 03 0387 00 0593 03 0670 00 0649 0387 00 0649 0670 00 0650 03 04 0387 00 0650 XX 0670 00 0661 0387 00 0661 0014 00 0184 0014 00 0225 0331 00 0102 0331 00 0103 0331 00 0104 0331 00 0108 0670 00 0675 0387 00 0675 0670 00 0716 0387 00 0716 0670 00 1134 0387 00 1134 0670 00 0724 0387 00 0724 Page 5 2 5 4 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 16 5 17 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 28 5 29 5 32 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 14 5 15 Revised 12 21 00 5 1 Accutorr Plus with Datascope SpO2 or without SpO2 1 Detailed functional descriptions are found in the Theory of Operations section 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines a
232. sted by the user Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 9 DISPLAY TIME OUT MODE To conserve power most displays will blank at user selected times The LCD illumination time out can be set between 3 and 15 minutes The LED display time out can be set between 5 and 60 minutes Since the Accutorr Plus can be powered from either an AC or DC source the user configuration allows the setting of separate times for each type of power source See User Configuration section 1 3 15 for more information on setting the time out minutes To turn on the LCD light press the MENU key 8 To turn on the LED displays press any key Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 10 SpO2 MEASUREMENTS Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 To obtain SpO2 measurements and SpO2 Heart Rate from the Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 See Section 3 10 1 for units with Datascope SpO2 for units with Nellcor SpO see section 3 10 2 for units with Masimo SpOz see section 1 3 10 3 CAUTION Do not place the sensor om an extremity with an invasive catheter or blood pressure cuff in place CAUTION A pulse oximeter should not be used as an apeana mnitor CAUTION A pulse oximeter should be considered an early warning device As a trend towards patient deoxygenation is indicated blood samples should be analyzed by a laboratory co oximeter to completely understand the patient s condition CAUTION Ensure proper routing of the patient
233. t converters are diode or ed from either the bulk output of the battery output in order to provide operation without AC power applied Battery Charger for Lithium Ion battery The battery charger provides a two phase fast charge algorithm for Li Ion batteries In phase one the charger regulates constant current until the battery reaches the maximum cell voltage MCV The charger then moves to phase two and regulates the battery voltage at MCV until the charging current falls to 1496 of nominal The charger then terminates until the battery voltage falls below 9596 of MCV The charger monitors battery condition battery temperature charging time as well as load on the outputs during battery charging operation If che battery is severely depleted the charger will trickle charge at a rate of 1 Hz until the battery is revived The charger will suspend fast charge if the battery temperature is below 0 Deg C or above 45 Deg C The charger will also suspend fast charge if the battery has not reached voltage regulation within its allotted time If the Accutorr unit is operated during battery charger operation then the maximum fast charge current will be reduced Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 2 7 Communication Board The Accutorr Plus Communication module provides the communication signal interface between the LED CPU board 0670 00 0650 01 and the external communication interface connectors
234. t for the systolic display which shows the current high systolic alarm value The word HI is displayed in the Interval Elap Time Temp display 33 When the unit has been configured to display graphics the symbol is displayed When the graphic is displayed the top lines blink This indicates the high alarm is selected The second time the SET ALARMS key 29 is pressed the Systolic LO parameter is selected The word LO is displayed in the Interval Elap Time Temp display 33 When the unit has been configured to display graphics the symbol is displayed When the graphic is displayed the bottom lines blink This indicates the low alarm is selected Each time the SET ALARMS key 29 is pressed a new parameter is selected for alarm setting all other displays blank The order they are available is Systolic HI Systolic LO Diastolic HI Diastolic LO MAP HI MAP LO Pulse Rate HI and Pulse Rate LO SpO HI and SpO LO When all of the available parameters have been selected the next press of the SET ALARMS key returns the Accutorr Plus to normal operation 2 To change an alarm limit setting use the Patient Info Up amp Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 The Up arrow increments the alarm limit setting The Down arrow decrements the alarm limit setting To cancel all of the changed alarm values while still in progress of changing press the DEFAULTS key 14 1 beep tone If the SET ALARMS or Arrow keys have not been pressed for
235. ter CMOS 4069 U3 13 0155 00 0772 02 Quad 2 input NAND w Schmitt U4 trigger input 74HC132 14 0155 00 0868 01 IC LB1257 8 channel driver U2 15 16 17 0155 90 0292 02 IC Programmed Printer Control U1 LB1257 18 0161 00 0015 RECORDER Thermal Printer Mechanism 19 0211 13 0206 00 SCREW M2x0 4 6mm long pan head ss 20 0283 04 0104 CAPACITOR Ceramic 0 1uF C1 C2 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 100V 10 21 0283 05 0102 CAPACITOR Ceramic X7R C17 1000pF 200V 10 22 0283 10 1821 CAPACITOR Ceramic Ultra Stable C16 820pF 100V 5 23 0290 00 0122 CAPACITOR ELECTROLYTIC C4 C5 C6 Aluminum 3300 pF 10 V radial 24 0290 07 2223 CAPACITOR Electrolytic Aluminum C3 22uF 16V 20 25 0307 06 2102 RESISTOR NETWORK 10 pin SIP RN1 1k 26 0311 01 1503 RESISTOR Variable 1 2W 50k R1 horizontal mount 27 0315 00 0101 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R8 R9 R22 R23 R24 R25 1 4 W 100 5 28 0315 00 0102 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R12 R14 R16 1 4 W 1k 596 29 0315 00 0103 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R7 R13 R15 R18 1 4 W 10k 5 30 0315 00 0104 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R6 R10 R11 1 4 W 100k 596 31 0315 00 0123 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R3 1 4 W 12k 5 32 0315 00 0164 RESISTOR FIXED Carbon film R2 1 4 W 160k 596 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts Revised 12 20 00 6 23 Recorder Board Assembly 067
236. th or without Recorder Infrared Therrmometer Module Predictive Thermometer Module Operating Humidity Shock and Vibration Shipping Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Operating Altitude 3 5 Electrical Ratings Voltage Current Frequency Power Consumption Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 3 Specifications 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F 18 C to 40 C 65 F to 104 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 90 F 15 to 9096 max non condensing Meets IEC 68 2 27 IEC 68 2 37 Meets ISTA Test Procedure 1A less than 100 lbs 15 C to 40 C 5 F to 104 F 10 to 9596 non condensing 10123 hPa to 782 hPa 0 to 7 000 ft for units with an LCD 1013 hPa to 697 hPa 0 to 10 000 ft for units without an LCD 100 120 220 240 VAC 0 6 0 3 60 50 Hz 40 W maximum Revised 12 20 00 3 6 Agency Compliance The Accutorr Plus is designed to comply with the following agency standards EN 60601 1 1990 Medical Electrical Equipment General Requirements for Safety UL 2601 1 1994 CSA 22 2 No 601 1 M90 EN 475 1995 Medical Devices Electrically Generated Alarm Signals ISO 9919 1992 High End units only Pulse Oximeters for Medical Use Requirements EN 60601 2 30 1995 Particular requirements for the safety of automatic cycling indirect blood pressure monitoring equipment IEC 60601 1 2 2001 Particular requirements for safety EMC EMC Requirements per FDA 510K Revi
237. the LCD Up or Down Arrow key 9 amp 10 Time 00 185 105 135 Alarm Violated Measurement Figure 1 10 LCD Trend List Display 1 3 6 3 To Delete the Stored Measurements on all Models of the Accutorr Plus While viewing stored data you can delete the most recent measurement or all of the stored measurements for the currently displayed patient Select a room bed where stored information can be deleted See section 1 3 2 3 for details on selecting a room bed If it is the currently displayed room bed go to step 2 When you are uncertain what rooms beds have stored data press and hold the DATA SCAN key 22 2 beep tones more than 3 seconds The Accutorr Plus will scan through all of the rooms beds that have data stored To stop on a Room Bed as the Accutorr Plus is scanning press the DATA SCAN key 22 NOTE The Accutorr Plus will scan through the rooms bed with stored data only once On the Accutorr Plus NIBP only when the desired room bed is displayed press the DATA SCAN key 22 1 beep tone The DATA SCAN Indicator 23 illuminates When the most recent stored data is displayed press and hold the DELETE INFO key 21 1 beep tone approx 3 seconds to delete this measurement When viewing any of the stored measurements press and hold the DELETE INFO key 21 2 beep tones approx 6 seconds to delete all stored measurements for the current patient When all data is cleared the patient
238. the MAP display Use the Patient Info Up amp Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to change the cuff pressure Start NIBP Key Press this key to initiate an NIBP measurement If a measurement is already in progress a new measurement can not be initiated until a minimum of 10 seconds after the end of the one in progress 30 seconds when in the interval mode The Start NIBP LED indicator is illuminated when a measurement can begin Start NIBP Indicator This LED indicator is illuminated when the Accutorr Plus is ready to initiate an NIBP measurement Patient Size Indicators One of theses LEDs illuminates to indicate the selected patient size Hidden Key To enter the Service Diagnostics mode press and hold this key 1 beep tone while the Accutorr Plus is powering on and running the self tests all 8 s displayed in the LEDs The Service Diagnostics mode is used to initiate various performance tests that are to be done by technical service personnel only To exit Service Diagnostics power down the Accutorr Plus by pressing the On Standby key Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 2 2 Rear Panel Figure 1 5 Rear Panel All Units Thermometer Module Connector Used to attached one of the optional Datascope thermometer modules PTM or AccuTemp IR Equipotential Lug Provides equipotential bonding between hospital equipment AC Power Co
239. the MAP display and the elapsed test time in seconds is displayed in the Temperature Time Interval display After the leakage measurement time has elapsed the MAP and Temperature Time Interval displays are blanked and a 00 Pass or FF Fail will be displayed in the Bed window Pressing the Deflate key at any time during the test causes the NIBP module to open all valves and ends the test The maximum pressure drop shall be no more than 10 mmHg in any 90 second period when connected to a 700 cc volume Pressing the Deflate key ends the test and deflates the chamber Pressing and holding the Deflate key for three seconds clears the MAP display and exits the test 7 5 9 Over Pressure Test 8a 8b 8 Select Room Number and Bed Letter per table 7 7 Press the NIBP Start key to activate the test This test evaluates the ability of the system to prevent an over pressure condition independent of software control for each of 3 over pressure settings A fixed volume of 700 cc s is pumped to a target pressure that is above the maximum over pressure specified Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 9 20 07 Chapter 7 Calibration for the respective over pressure limit see table 7 7 while displaying the real time system pressure in the MAP display For this test the software over pressure monitor is disabled On completion the MAP display indicates the maximum pressure reached and the Patient Bed Letter Display indicates if the
240. the cuff pressure drops below the diastolic pressure the results of the measurement are displayed and the cuff is vented to atmosphere If an error code displays in the Systolic Display or a status code in the Room Bed Display refer to Section 1 3 16 Status and Error Codes for its explanation A successful measurement clears a status code To clear a status code press the ROOM BED NUMBER key 24 6 When required press the DEFLATE key 36 to interrupt a measurement The cuff will deflate NOTE Once the initial measurement is taken for room bed the Accutorr Plus will continue to use the selected patient size NOTE Check the patient s limb for any indications of circulation impairment Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 1 22 1 3 3 1 NIBP Pressure Limit Fail Safe If the cuff is over pressurized it will automatically deflate and the status code 8812 STOP CUFF OVERPRESSURE or error code 987 STOP HARDWARE OVERPRESSU RE will bedisplayed in the Room Bed or display Theunit must beturned off and back on again to reset the hardware overpressure switch error code 987 before any new measurements can be taken 1 3 3 2 Cuff Inflation Time If the cuff pressure does not attain 20 mmH g within 40 seconds of the start of inflation or if thetarget pressure is not reached within another 60 seconds then the cuff is deflated and status codes will be displayed in the Room Bed display See section 1 3 16 for a
241. thout SpO option may not display results for tests Oc and Od Press ROOM BED again to lock in selection Press the START NIBP key Press the DEFLATE key until a beep is heard This allows a selection of the next test Repeat process for test b Installed Software Version ie 01 02 Software Module Selection ie ACM Runtime software identifier TIMER TEMP Coe Figure 7 1 Software Version Test Description of Software Module Test Room Number Sub Test Patient Bed Letter ACM Runtime Software Version 0 a ACM Boot Software Version b 5 2 ACM Runtime Software Version c SpO2 ACM Boot Software Version 0 0 0 d Table 7 2 NOTE Monitors with Nellcor and Masimo SpO2 do not report SpO2 Runtime and Boot Software Versions Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration Revised 2 15 00 7 5 3 Keypad Test 1 Press the Room Up arrow to change the Room Number to 1 Press the Start NIBP key to run the keypad test Press any key on the keyboard A number will appear in the Patient Bed Letter Display This number is identified in the figure 7 2 Verify that the correct number appears in the Patient Bed Letter Display when each key is pressed Hidden Key Start Test
242. to display NIBP error codes and systolic alarm limits NIBP Diastolic Display Displays the diastolic blood pressure data from NIBP measurements It is also used to display diastolic alarm limits NIBP MAP Display Displays the mean arterial pressure MAP information from NIBP measurements During a measurement it will display the cuff pressure It is also used to display the MAP alarm limits and the inflation pressure when selecting the initial inflation pressure Pulse Rate Display Displays the pulse rate information from either the NIBP measurement or the SpO2 reading Accutorr Plus model with SpO It is also used to display pulse rate alarm limits NIBP SpO2 Pulse Rate Indicator When the pulse rate displayed is based on an NIBP measurement chen NIBP is illu minated When the pulse rate displayed is based on an SpO2 measurement Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 then SpO2 is illuminated SpO Display Accutorr Plus model with SpOz2 Displays the SpO2 measurement information This area is also used to display the SpOz2 alarm limits Liquid Crystal Display LCD Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen The Liquid Crystal Display LCD is used to display previous measurements trend list for the selected patient or a menu that controls the beep volume and alarm volume Menu Key Accutorr Plus models with Trend Screen This key is used to toggle between the trend list screen and the menu screen in the LCD When the back li
243. to Power Supply board JA to CPU board Disconnect plastic tubing from center port of air pump Pull out the remaining plastic tubing that was originally connected at the front panel cuff connector Remove the shield from the NIBP Module Remove the 3 screws from the NIBP Board remove the board 4 6 6 Removal of the Power Supply Assembly 41 1 Remove the rear housing as indicated above Disconnect the ribbon cable at J3 PRECAUTION Do not remove the screws located at the end of the circuit board the board will not come out and may damage internal connections Remove the two screws on the metal chassis heat sink near J3 then remove two more screws at the AC power input end J2 Slide the complete assembly out about one inch Disconnect J2 the AC connector from the circuit assembly and slide out the Power Supply assembly completely 4 10 Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 4 Repair Information 4 6 7 Removal of the Motor Filter 34 and LCD High Voltage Assembly 35 NOTE The Motor Filter board and LCD High Voltage circuits are mounted on a common metal heat sink and must be removed as one assembly 1 Locate the assembly by tracing the wires from the air pump motor Remove the three screws in the chassis in the area between the AC power connector assembly and the back of the NIBP circuit Disconnect the LCD back light connector J1 and power connector J2 Pull t
244. track pulses on patients with decreased peripheral perfusion Datascope SpO Sensor Selection Table Sensors Large Adult Pediatric Infant Adult Datasensor Adult LA A P D Ear AE Approximate gt 80kg 0 90kg 10 4 5 gt 40kg 40 kg Patient Weight gt 176 lbs 66 198 40kg 10kg gt 88 Ibs 90 165 lbs 22 88 10 22 lbs lbs Where Used Fingers Fingers Fingers Feet Adult Fingers Toes Toes Toes Toes Palms Ear Big Toes Long or Short Long amp Long amp Long amp Long amp Long amp Short Term Term Moni Short Short Short Short Short toring Term Term Term Term Term Electro Surgical Included Included Included Included Included Included Interference Suppression ESIS Reusable Yes Upto YesUpto YesUp YesUp Yes Up Yes 20 Uses 20 Uses 1020 to 20 to 20 6 Months Uses Uses Uses Bandage Type Adhesive Adhesive Adhesive Non Adhesive Disposable Disposable Disposable Disposable Adhesive Part Sensors 0998 00 0 0998 00 0998 00 0998 00 0998 00 0600 00 0026 01 fk 076 06 0076 05 0076 04 0074 03 0074 05 3 sensor cable Bandages 0683 00 0 0683 00 0683 00 0683 00 N A N A 409 01 0409 02 0409 03 0415 Non adbesive bandages are recommended for premature infants to minimize prenatal skin damage See Accessories Chapter 5 for more detailed information xxx Additional choices 0060 00 0026 0
245. ug the other end of the patient cable into the SpO connector 15 NOTE Do not place the sensor on an extremity with an invasive catheter or blood pressure cuff in place NOTE Ensure proper routing of patient cable to avoid entanglement and or strangulation CAUTION When equipped with MASIMO 502 use only MASIMO oxygen transducers including MASIMO LNOP patient dedicated adhesive sensors and MASIMO PC12 Patient Cable Use of other oxygen transducers may cause improper oximeter performance CAUTION Tissue damage or inaccurate measurements may be caused by incorrect sensor application or use such as wrapping it too tightly applying supplemental tape failing to inspect the sensor site periodically or failing to position it appropriately Carefully read the sensor directions for use the Accutorr Plus operating instructions and all precautionary information before use CAUTION Excessive ambient light may cause inaccurate measurements Cover the sensor site with opaque material CAUTION Inaccurate measurements may be caused by incorrect sensor application or use significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins e g carboxyhemoglobin or methemoglobin or intra vascular dyes such as indocyanine green methylene blue exposure to excessive illumination such as surgical lamps especially ones with a xenon light source bilirubin lamps fluorescent lights infrared heating lamps or direct sunlight excessive patient movement veno
246. ument covers are removed observe these following warnings and general guidelines Do not short component leads together Perform all steps in the exact order given Use extreme care when reaching inside the opened instrument Do not contact exposed metal parts which may become live Read through each step in the procedure so it is understood prior to beginning the step 7 3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED Equipment types other than these listed may be utilized if they perform the required functions Dynatech Nevada Non Invasive Blood Pressure Simulator Cuff Link Power Supply Power Mate 3A 20V Fluke DVM Model 8050A Digital Storage Scope Tektronix 2230 100MHZ Stop Watch Wilson LW 19 SpO2 Simulator Biotek Index RS232 Test Connector pins 2 and 3 shorted 9 pin male 700cc Dummy Cuff 0138 00 0001 01 Chart Paper 0683 00 0300 01 Water Bath Cole Palmer model H 12 105 10 Reference Quartz Thermometer Hewlet Packard model HP 2804A with Temp Probe HP 1811A Predictive Thermometer Simulator 0454 00 0017 NOTE Not approved for sale to customers in CE countries Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 7 Calibration 7 4 POWER UP SEQUENCE INTERNAL TESTING 1 Attach the AC power cord into the UUT rear panel AC Input Module Press the On Standby key to turn the UUT On The UUT automatically performs internal self diagnostics Verify that all the LED s Light Emitting D
247. until the NIBP Start key is pressed 1 3 4 2 Changing the Interval Setting If the interval time is changed while the Accutorr Plus is in the interval mode the new interval time is used once it is entered For example The interval time is set to 60 minutes Thirty minutes have elapsed since the last timed automatic measurement and the interval time is changed to 10 minutes Once the interval time is entered the Accutorr Plus will take an automatic NIBP measurement in 10 minutes and then once every 10 minutes 1 3 4 3 Effects of Changing the Room Number and or Bed Letter on the Interval Setting When the Room Number and or Bed Letter is changed the interval setting will remain the same NOTE The interval setting can be changed if required Also if an NIBP measurement is in progress the measurement will stop and the cuff will deflate The timed interval measurements will not activate again interval indicator flashes until the START NIBP key 38 is pressed 1 3 4 4 START and DEFLATE Functions The START NIBP and DEFLATE functions have the following effects on the timed measurement sequence INTERVAL mode is active and the START NIBP key 38 is pressed causing an unscheduled measurement to be taken Taking this unscheduled measurement does not affect the timing of the interval cycle therefore the scheduled measurements will still be taken as if there were no interruptions Only one measurement is taken for each measurement cycle
248. ure in the MAP display Adjust R O on the 0670 00 0584 01 PCB until the MAP readout is the same as the simulator s manometer reading Press the Deflate key to exit this test Repeat 7 5 12 Main Pressure Transducer Verification 7 5 16 Over Pressure Transducer Calibration NOTE This procedure should only be performed if a failure occurred in steps 1 through 3 of 7 5 14 Over Pressure Transducer Verification This is the procedure for calibrating the over pressure transducer in the event that the display does not read 158 mmHg during the test for Low pressure mode in 7 5 14 Over Pressure Transducer Verification The transducer is calibrated using R4 on the 0670 00 0584 01 PCB 1 Adjust R on the 0670 00 0584 01 PCB until MAP read out is 158 mmHg 2 Repeat 7 5 14 Over Pressure Transducer Verification 7 5 17 Battery Selection 13 This section will allow the user to configure the unit for a Sealed Lead Acid or Lithium Ion battery 1 Select diagnostic test Room 13 2 Press the Start NIBP to enable the selection process The pump will NOT start up The Diastolic display will show the currently configured battery type Sealed Lead Acid will be represented by La and Lithium Ion will be represented by Li Using the Patient Info Up Down arrow keys select the appropriate battery type Press the Deflate key to confirm your choice If the Deflate key is not pressed the change will not take effect Accut
249. urer Most simulators properly maintained will provide reasonably accurate and consistent results but may not produce the exact results when connected to similar monitors from different manufacturers However the consistent performance of a simulator is a good indicator of any change in the performance in the monitor For example an accurate mercury column for pressure verification Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance 8 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The following preventive maintenance steps are required for continued satisfactory performance and safety of the Accutorr Plus and optional accessories Inspections and replacement of consumable supplies and accessories that are subject to normal wear must be accomplished at least as frequently as the inspection of the host unit Read the Warranty statement in the Operating Instructions for description of warranty conditions The suggested minimum maintenance schedule is based on normally expected wear and tear of system and components The intervals may be shortened at the user s discretion when conditions of use may warrant In case of internal instrument failure component replacement and possible or actual instrument damage it is strongly recommended that complete performance and safety verification be conducted 8 3 1 Mechanical and Physical Visual Inspection One Year Interval Check the following items for wear and physical damage Repair or re
250. uring motion and automatically reducing it during quiet periods to obtain a fast response This combination reduces the number of monitoring interruptions and false alarms from patient motion Tracking of Weak Peripheral Pulse Levels Many patients suffer poor peripheral perfusion due to hypothermia hypovolemia reduced cardiac output etc The Accutorr Plus model with SpO is designed to automatically increase its gain to track patients with poor peripheral perfusion Rejection of Ambient Light Many monitoring situations involve high levels of ambient light i e operating room lights neonatal phototherapy heat warmers etc The Accutorr Plus model with SpO the sensors and the bandages each contribute to the rejection of ambient light The monitor automatically measures and corrects for high levels ofambient light The enclosed design ofthe DATASENSOR prohibits the interference of high levels of ambient light on adults with sensor operation The opaque material used in the composition of the bandages which are used with the FLEXISENSOR SD helps keep out ambient light Patient Comfort The FLEXISENSOR SD line is designed to work with a disposable bandage of two styles SENSOR GUARD TM and Coban which conform comfortably and safely to the particular patient s anatomy B Sensor Selection and Application Selection of a specific sensor is based on the patient s size physical condition and expected monitoring duration General gui
251. us pulsations electro surgical Revised 06 19 01 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation interference and placement of a sensor on an extremity that has a blood pressure cuff arterial catheter or intra vascular line CAUTION In certain situations in which perfusion and signal strength low such as in patients with thick or pigmented skin inaccurately low SpO2 readings will result Verification of oxygenation should be made especially in preterm infants and patients with chronic lung disease before instituting any therapy or intervention CAUTION patients suffer from poor peripheral perfusion due to hypothermia hypovolemia severe vasoconstriction reduced cardiac output etc These symptoms may cause a loss in vital sign readings CAUTION The site should be checked at least every eight 8 hours every four 4 hours with the Adult re usable finger sensor Ensure proper adhesion skin integrity and proper alignment Nail polish and fungus may effect readings Exercise extreme caution with poorly perfused patients Skin erosion and pressure necrosis can be caused when sensors are not frequently monitored Assess the site every two 2 hours with poorly perfused patients CAUTION If the sensor or patient cable is damaged in any way discontinue use immediately To prevent damage do not soak or immerse the sensor in any liquid solution Do not attempt to sterilize 3 The digital SpO value and SpO2 Pu
252. via a three wire download communications interface The required drivers are located on the LED CPU board and only a signal path is provided to the external interface connector ESD protection for the signal lines is provided by part of U3 Communications is to support a 2 wire interface 2 signals and a ground The signals are Tip being transmit Ring is receive and shield is ground The on board DC DC convertor provides 12VDC power required for wireless telemetry that will be a future feature available for Accutorr Plus as well as some local circuitry The DC DC converter is implemented using a Maxim MAX1771 DC DC controller used in the Buck Boost configuration The supply is designed to deliver 12 Vdc 9 100 mA minimum When the SHDN pin 01 4 is high the MAX1771 enters the shutdown mode and its output is approximately zero volts The shutdown mode is controlled by the state of either of two logic signals NCALL or If either of the signals is logic 0 the DC DC converter will operate normally i Accutorr Plus Service Manual R d 12 20 00 NES Chapter 2 Theory of Operation DC DC CONVERTER CSTAT SB NCALL TD ooo SSB RD RS232 lt 42721 NCALL Figure 2 8 TD 2 35 gt Reine ommunication Board XCEIVER Block Diagram RD 4 The pin assignments for
253. vice Manual Chapter 6 Parts Added 12 20 00 6 45 This page intentionally left blank Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 6 Parts 7 0 CALIBRATION CONTENTS OF THIS CHAPTER Diagnostic Menu Table 7 1 Introduction 7 2 Warnings and Guidelines 7 3 Test Equipment and Special Tools Required 7 4 Power Up Sequence Internal Testing 7 5 Service Diagnostics 7 5 1 Introduction Hidden Key 7 5 2 Software Version Test 0a Ob Oc Od 7 5 3 Keypad Test 7 5 4 LED Test 2a 2b 7 5 5 Communications Test 3a 3b 7 5 6 Recorder Test 4 7 5 6 1 Recorder Print Head Adjustment 7 5 7 Pump Test 5 7 5 8 Leak Test 7 7 5 9 Over Pressure Test 8a 8b 8c 7 5 10 7 5 11 7 9 12 7 5 13 7 5 14 19 09 72 16 7 5 17 Pulse Channel DC Offset Test 9a Ob 9c Pulse Channel Average Noise Test 10a 10b 10 7 10 Main Pressure Transducer Verification Test 11a 11b 11c Verification of Accutorr Plus Pneumatic Performance Using the Cufflink NIBP Emulator 11d Over Pressure Transducer Verification 12c 12a 12b 7 12 Main Pressure Transducer Calibration Over Pressure Transducer Calibration Battery Selection 13 Predictive Thermometer Verification and Calibration 7 6 1 Temperature Accuracy Verification with the Predictive Temperature simulator 7 6 2 Water Bath Method 7 6 3 System Calibration Procedure 7 6 4 Temperature Verification Test Infrared Thermometer 7 6 5 Low Battery Sensing
254. vious data and to change initial inflation pressure Patient Info Up Arrow Key This key is used to increment the alarm limits when they are shown on the LED displays and to increment the hours minutes month day and year in the clock set mode This key is also used to change the Room Bed to scroll through previous data and to change initial inflation pressure Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 1 Operation 29 Set Alarms Key This key is used to select the NIBP and SpO Accutorr Plus model with SpO2 alarms to be changed Repeated presses of this key sequences through the choices of Systolic Hi Systolic Lo Diastolic Hi Diastolic Lo Map Hi Map Lo Pulse Rate Hi Pulse Rate Lo 5 2 Hi and SpO Lo After the last available parameter the next press returns the unit to normal operation Once the desired parameter is flashing use the Patient Info Up amp Down Arrow keys 27 amp 28 to increment or decrement the alarm values Mute Key Press this key one beep tone to silence the current alarm tone for 2 minutes If a new alarm is detected during the 2 minutes a new alarm tone will sound Press and hold 2 beep tones approx 3 seconds to permanently silence all alarm tones Press this key again 1 beep tone to activate alarm tones Mute Indicator This LED indicator is illuminated when the alarm tone has been silenced permanently and when the alarm volume is set to OFF Timer Temp Key This key i
255. w until a conversion is completed and data is ready for transfer CS must be active low for 1 425us before SER starts toggling EOC will go low 2 205 max from last Recorder interface The recorder interface is a buffered 8 bit parallel data bus with handshaking and reset capability through connector J5 The buffering provides pass through filtering and ESD suppression is provided U35 WR RECD is driven by the LED CPU board and used by the recorder to latch the data bus This interface is handled by the DMA capability of the MC68302 The recorder drives two signals DREQ and HOME DREQ specifies to the MC68302 to send the next byte of data HOME will specify when the recorder has reached its starting point to begin a new line Revised 12 20 00 Accutorr Plus Service Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Temperature interface This is a serial interface operating in one direction The MC68302 is set up to receive serial information through connector J4 The signals are TTL levels Also this connector will accept two temperature modules one a Predictive the other an Infrared module The software will query the MC68302 ports to determine if and what temperature module is installed When the Predictive module is attached PRED is pulled to active low When the Infrared module is attached TYMP is pulled to active low LED Drivers U8 U9 U10 and U1 on the Keypanel The seven segment LED s and gree
256. ware pressure limit is in addition to a software controlled limit which will provide redundant fail safe operation upon a fault condition The Linear Bleed NIBP module has a single proportional valve having a continuously variable effective orifice size This valve is controlled by a servo loop such that the cuff deflation rate is closely and automatically regulated to a specified value despite changes in the cuff volume and pressure In addition the NIBP module distributes the power from the power supply which includes power and control signals to the LED CPU module Via the LED CPU boatd power is distributed to the rest of the system such as the Recorder and the SpO modules Also the NIBP module supplies separate power and control to a Pump filter board which powers the NIBP pump b LCD back light converter Accutorr Plus Service Manual Revised 12 20 00 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Software Control There are no software requirements on this board The microcontroller for this board s functions are located on the LED CPU board Hardware Functions Pressure transducer circuitry A pressure transducer and amplifier is provided to acquire the cuff pressure signal Performance is consistent with pressure range and accuracy specifications for the NIBP module Over pressure transducer circuitry An over pressure transducer independent of the main pressure transducer is provided An amplifier a comparator with three sel
257. y silence the alarm tone The MUTE LED 31 illuminated The LEDs for the alarming parameter will continue to flash To reactivate the alarm tone function press the MUTE key 30 again 1 3 5 4 Alarms and Changing the Room Number or Bed Letter W hen changing the rooms and beds the alarm settings will change if the final room bed displayed is a different patient size than the original room bed W hen a new patient size is detected the alarm settings change to the defaults for the different patient size See section 1 3 15 for information on custom defaults The table below describes 6 measurements in different rooms beds and different patient sizes and the effect on the alarm settings Measurement Order Room Bed Patient Size Alarm Settings 1 Adult H ave been manually set 2 16 Adult Remain the same 3 2 a Pediatric Changed to defaults for a pediatric size patient 4 3 a Adult Changed to defaults for an adult size patient 5 Ala Adult Remain the same 6 Adult Remain the same If the alarm settings that were set from the 14 measurement are required they need to be set again manually NOTE Thealarm settings can be changed if necessary when changing the room bed and the patient size is the same PRECAUTION It is theusers responsibility when changing theroom bed to assurethe patient sizeand alarm settings areas required Chapter 1 Operation 1 3 6 TO V
258. y shown but not R 2 D ZE 0670 00 0593 03 8 do 2 9d 9 sl used in all versions 5 gt 5 5 9a Bah M az 2 gt m m re i J2 Lem s cM receptacle Front Panel 7 bos 1 5 001230071229 2 Temp Probe receptacle m 5 0012 00 0953 WITH 9 V battery or 2 0012 00 1335 WITHOUT 9V battery o 2 o 2 Accutorr Plus with Datascope SpO or without SpO Wiring Block Diagram Revised 12 20 00 2 6 Notes 1 Detailed functional descriptions features 3 Shaded blocks are considered black box devices Accutorr Plus with NELLCOR SpO2 or without SpO2 Li lon Batt Cable ri 0997 00 0944 10 8 V Battery are found in the Theory of Operations section Wi ri ng Diag ram Lithium lon 2 Functional blocks with dashed outlines are optional SLA Batt Cable 0146 00 0069 0406 00 0754 OR ES S DC Power Supply g 12V Battery E m 0014

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manuel d`installation et d`entretien Unité SI - compatible avec  IT Istruzioni per l'uso  22H-UVLAMPC (36V)  Mise en page 1 - Oleo-Mac  2002 Dimension One Spas Owner Manual  ViewSonic Wireless USB 2.0 Adapter (WUSB100) 802.11g/b  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file